7479 lines
214 KiB
C
7479 lines
214 KiB
C
#include "ctlspriv.h"
|
|
|
|
#include "scdttime.h"
|
|
#include "monthcal.h"
|
|
#include "prshti.h" // for StrDup_AtoW
|
|
|
|
// TODO
|
|
//
|
|
// #6329: When Min/Max range is set, then dates before the min
|
|
// or after the max are painted in the normal date color. They
|
|
// should be painted with MCSC_TRAILINGTEXT color. (Or we should
|
|
// add a new color to cover this case.) Feature requested by Jobi George
|
|
//
|
|
// 9577: We want a DAYSTATE like structure for the background
|
|
// color of dates. For highlighting. Perhaps a COLORSTATE per
|
|
// registered background color.
|
|
//
|
|
|
|
// private message
|
|
#define MCMP_WINDOWPOSCHANGED (MCM_FIRST - 1) // MCM_FIRST is way over WM_USER
|
|
#define DTMP_WINDOWPOSCHANGED (DTM_FIRST - 1) // DTM_FIRST is way over WM_USER
|
|
|
|
// MONTHCAL
|
|
LRESULT CALLBACK MonthCalWndProc(HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
|
|
LRESULT MCNcCreateHandler(HWND hwnd);
|
|
LRESULT MCCreateHandler(MONTHCAL *pmc, HWND hwnd, LPCREATESTRUCT lpcs);
|
|
LRESULT MCOnStyleChanging(MONTHCAL *pmc, UINT gwl, LPSTYLESTRUCT pinfo);
|
|
LRESULT MCOnStyleChanged(MONTHCAL *pmc, UINT gwl, LPSTYLESTRUCT pinfo);
|
|
void MCCalcSizes(MONTHCAL *pmc);
|
|
void MCHandleSetFont(MONTHCAL *pmc, HFONT hfont, BOOL fRedraw);
|
|
void MCPaint(MONTHCAL *pmc, HDC hdc);
|
|
void MCPaintMonth(MONTHCAL *pmc, HDC hdc, RECT *prc, int iMonth, int iYear, int iIndex,
|
|
BOOL fDrawPrev, BOOL fDrawNext, HBRUSH hbrSelect);
|
|
void MCNcDestroyHandler(HWND hwnd, MONTHCAL *pmc, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
|
|
void MCRecomputeSizing(MONTHCAL *pmc, RECT *prect);
|
|
LRESULT MCSizeHandler(MONTHCAL *pmc, RECT *prc);
|
|
void MCUpdateMonthNamePos(MONTHCAL *pmc);
|
|
void MCUpdateStartEndDates(MONTHCAL *pmc, SYSTEMTIME *pstStart);
|
|
void MCGetRcForDay(MONTHCAL *pmc, int iMonth, int iDay, RECT *prc);
|
|
void MCGetRcForMonth(MONTHCAL *pmc, int iMonth, RECT *prc);
|
|
void MCUpdateToday(MONTHCAL *pmc);
|
|
void MCUpdateRcDayCur(MONTHCAL *pmc, SYSTEMTIME *pst);
|
|
void MCUpdateDayState(MONTHCAL *pmc);
|
|
int MCGetOffsetForYrMo(MONTHCAL *pmc, int iYear, int iMonth);
|
|
int MCIsSelectedDayMoYr(MONTHCAL *pmc, int iDay, int iMonth, int iYear);
|
|
BOOL MCIsBoldOffsetDay(MONTHCAL *pmc, int nDay, int iIndex);
|
|
BOOL FGetOffsetForPt(MONTHCAL *pmc, POINT pt, int *piOffset);
|
|
BOOL FGetRowColForRelPt(MONTHCAL *pmc, POINT ptRel, int *piRow, int *piCol);
|
|
BOOL FGetDateForPt(MONTHCAL *pmc, POINT pt, SYSTEMTIME *pst,
|
|
int* piDay, int* piCol, int* piRow, LPRECT prcMonth);
|
|
LRESULT MCContextMenu(MONTHCAL *pmc, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
|
|
LRESULT MCLButtonDown(MONTHCAL *pmc, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
|
|
LRESULT MCLButtonUp(MONTHCAL *pmc, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
|
|
LRESULT MCMouseMove(MONTHCAL *pmc, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
|
|
LRESULT MCHandleTimer(MONTHCAL *pmc, WPARAM wParam);
|
|
LRESULT MCHandleKeydown(MONTHCAL *pmc, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
|
|
LRESULT MCHandleChar(MONTHCAL *pmc, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
|
|
int MCIncrStartMonth(MONTHCAL *pmc, int nDelta, BOOL fDelayDayChange);
|
|
void MCGetTitleRcsForOffset(MONTHCAL* pmc, int iOffset, LPRECT prcMonth, LPRECT prcYear);
|
|
BOOL MCSetDate(MONTHCAL *pmc, SYSTEMTIME *pst);
|
|
void MCNotifySelChange(MONTHCAL *pmc, UINT uMsg);
|
|
void MCInvalidateDates(MONTHCAL *pmc, SYSTEMTIME *pst1, SYSTEMTIME *pst2);
|
|
void MCInvalidateMonthDays(MONTHCAL *pmc);
|
|
void MCSetToday(MONTHCAL* pmc, SYSTEMTIME* pst);
|
|
void MCGetTodayBtnRect(MONTHCAL *pmc, RECT *prc);
|
|
void GetYrMoForOffset(MONTHCAL *pmc, int iOffset, int *piYear, int *piMonth);
|
|
BOOL FScrollIntoView(MONTHCAL *pmc);
|
|
void MCFreeCalendarInfo(PCALENDARTYPE pct);
|
|
void MCGetCalendarInfo(PCALENDARTYPE pct);
|
|
BOOL MCIsDateStringRTL(TCHAR tch);
|
|
|
|
// DATEPICK
|
|
LRESULT CALLBACK DatePickWndProc(HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
|
|
LRESULT DPNcCreateHandler(HWND hwnd);
|
|
LRESULT DPCreateHandler(DATEPICK *pdp, HWND hwnd, LPCREATESTRUCT lpcs);
|
|
LRESULT DPOnStyleChanging(DATEPICK *pdp, UINT gwl, LPSTYLESTRUCT pinfo);
|
|
LRESULT DPOnStyleChanged(DATEPICK *pdp, UINT gwl, LPSTYLESTRUCT pinfo);
|
|
void DPHandleLocaleChange(DATEPICK *pdp);
|
|
void DPDestroyHandler(HWND hwnd, DATEPICK *pdp, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
|
|
void DPHandleSetFont(DATEPICK *pdp, HFONT hfont, BOOL fRedraw);
|
|
void DPPaint(DATEPICK *pdp, HDC hdc);
|
|
void DPLBD_MonthCal(DATEPICK *pdp, BOOL fLButtonDown);
|
|
LRESULT DPLButtonDown(DATEPICK *pdp, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
|
|
LRESULT DPLButtonUp(DATEPICK *pdp, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
|
|
void DPRecomputeSizing(DATEPICK *pdp, RECT *prect);
|
|
LRESULT DPHandleKeydown(DATEPICK *pdp, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
|
|
LRESULT DPHandleChar(DATEPICK *pdp, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam);
|
|
void DPNotifyDateChange(DATEPICK *pdp);
|
|
BOOL DPSetDate(DATEPICK *pdp, SYSTEMTIME *pst, BOOL fMungeDate);
|
|
void DPDrawDropdownButton(DATEPICK *pdp, HDC hdc, BOOL fPressed);
|
|
void SECGetSystemtime(LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec, LPSYSTEMTIME pst);
|
|
|
|
static TCHAR const g_rgchMCName[] = MONTHCAL_CLASS;
|
|
static TCHAR const g_rgchDTPName[] = DATETIMEPICK_CLASS;
|
|
|
|
// MONTHCAL globals
|
|
#define g_szTextExtentDef TEXT("0000")
|
|
#define g_szNumFmt TEXT("%d")
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Epoch = the beginning of the universe (the earliest date we support)
|
|
// Armageddon = the end of the universe (the latest date we support)
|
|
//
|
|
// Epoch is 14-sep-1752 because that's when the Gregorian calendar
|
|
// kicked in. The day before 14-sep-1752 was 2-sep-1752 (in British
|
|
// and US history; other countries switched at other times).
|
|
//
|
|
// Armageddon is 31-dec-9999 because we assume four digits for years
|
|
// is enough. (Oh no, the Y10K problem...)
|
|
//
|
|
const SYSTEMTIME c_stEpoch = { 1752, 9, 0, 14, 0, 0, 0, 0 };
|
|
const SYSTEMTIME c_stArmageddon = { 9999, 12, 0, 31, 23, 59, 59, 999 };
|
|
|
|
void FillRectClr(HDC hdc, LPRECT prc, COLORREF clr)
|
|
{
|
|
COLORREF clrSave = SetBkColor(hdc, clr);
|
|
ExtTextOut(hdc,0,0,ETO_OPAQUE,prc,NULL,0,NULL);
|
|
SetBkColor(hdc, clrSave);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
BOOL InitDateClasses(HINSTANCE hinst)
|
|
{
|
|
WNDCLASS wndclass;
|
|
|
|
if (GetClassInfo(hinst, g_rgchMCName, &wndclass))
|
|
{
|
|
// we're already registered
|
|
DebugMsg(TF_MONTHCAL, TEXT("mc: Date Classes already initialized."));
|
|
return(TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
wndclass.style = CS_GLOBALCLASS;
|
|
wndclass.lpfnWndProc = MonthCalWndProc;
|
|
wndclass.cbClsExtra = 0;
|
|
wndclass.cbWndExtra = sizeof(LPVOID);
|
|
wndclass.hInstance = hinst;
|
|
wndclass.hIcon = NULL;
|
|
wndclass.hCursor = LoadCursor(NULL, IDC_ARROW);
|
|
wndclass.hbrBackground = (HBRUSH)(COLOR_WINDOW + 1);
|
|
wndclass.lpszMenuName = NULL;
|
|
wndclass.lpszClassName = g_rgchMCName;
|
|
|
|
if (!RegisterClass(&wndclass))
|
|
{
|
|
DebugMsg(DM_WARNING, TEXT("mc: MonthCalClass failed to initialize"));
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
wndclass.lpfnWndProc = DatePickWndProc;
|
|
wndclass.hbrBackground = (HBRUSH)(COLOR_WINDOW + 1);
|
|
wndclass.lpszClassName = g_rgchDTPName;
|
|
|
|
if (!RegisterClass(&wndclass))
|
|
{
|
|
DebugMsg(DM_WARNING, TEXT("mc: DatePickClass failed to initialize"));
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
DebugMsg(TF_MONTHCAL, TEXT("mc: Date Classes initialized successfully."));
|
|
return(TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
|
|
//
|
|
// MonthCal stuff
|
|
//
|
|
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
|
|
|
|
////////////////////////////////////
|
|
//
|
|
// MCInsert/RemoveMarkers
|
|
//
|
|
// QuickSummary: Convert the string "MMMM yyyy" into "\1MMMM\3 \2yyyy\4".
|
|
//
|
|
// In order to lay out the month/year info in the header, we have to be
|
|
// able to extract the month and year out of the formatted string so we
|
|
// know what their rectangles are. We do this by wrapping the month and
|
|
// year inserts with markers so we can extract them after formatting.
|
|
//
|
|
// Since \1 through \4 are control characters, they won't conflict with
|
|
// displayable characters in the actual format string. And just to play it
|
|
// safe, if we actually see a format character, we erase it from the string.
|
|
//
|
|
// MCInsertMarkers inserts the markers into the output string so we can
|
|
// extract the substrings later. Quotation marks are funky since you can
|
|
// write a format of "'The' mm'''th month of' yyyy". Note that a simple
|
|
// even-odd test works for detecting whether we are inside or outside
|
|
// quotation marks, even in the nested quotation mark case.
|
|
//
|
|
void MCInsertMarkers(LPTSTR pszOut, LPCTSTR pszIn)
|
|
{
|
|
BOOL fInQuote = FALSE;
|
|
UINT flSeen = 0;
|
|
UINT flThis;
|
|
|
|
for (;;)
|
|
{
|
|
TCHAR ch = *pszIn;
|
|
switch (ch) {
|
|
|
|
// At end of string, terminate the output buffer and go home
|
|
case TEXT('\0'):
|
|
*pszOut = TEXT('\0');
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
case TEXT('m'):
|
|
case TEXT('M'):
|
|
flThis = IMM_MONTHSTART;
|
|
goto CheckMarker;
|
|
|
|
case TEXT('y'):
|
|
flThis = IMM_YEARSTART;
|
|
goto CheckMarker;
|
|
|
|
CheckMarker:
|
|
// If inside a quotation mark or we've already done this guy,
|
|
// then just treat it as a regular character.
|
|
if (fInQuote || (flSeen & flThis))
|
|
goto CopyChar;
|
|
|
|
flSeen |= flThis;
|
|
|
|
*pszOut++ = (TCHAR)flThis;
|
|
// Don't need to use CharNext because we know *pszIn is "m" "M" or "y"
|
|
for ( ; *pszIn == ch; pszIn++)
|
|
{
|
|
*pszOut++ = ch;
|
|
}
|
|
*pszOut++ = (TCHAR)(flThis + DMM_STARTEND);
|
|
|
|
// Restart the loop so we re-parse the character at *pszIn
|
|
continue;
|
|
|
|
// Toggle the quotation mark gizmo if we see one, and then just
|
|
// copy it.
|
|
case '\'':
|
|
fInQuote ^= TRUE;
|
|
goto CopyChar;
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Don't let these sneak into the output format or it
|
|
// will confuse us.
|
|
//
|
|
case IMM_MONTHSTART:
|
|
case IMM_YEARSTART:
|
|
case IMM_MONTHEND:
|
|
case IMM_YEAREND:
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
CopyChar:
|
|
*pszOut++ = ch;
|
|
#ifndef UNICODE
|
|
if (IsDBCSLeadByte(ch) && pszIn[1]) {
|
|
*pszOut++ = *++pszIn;
|
|
}
|
|
#endif
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
pszIn++; // We handled the DBCS case already
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// NOTREACHED
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// MCRemoveMarkers hunts down the marker characters and strips them out,
|
|
// recording their locations in the optional MONTHMETRICS (as character
|
|
// indices).
|
|
//
|
|
|
|
void MCRemoveMarkers(LPTSTR pszBuf, PMONTHMETRICS pmm)
|
|
{
|
|
int iWrite, iRead;
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// If by some horrid error we can't find our markers, just pretend
|
|
// they were at the start of the string.
|
|
//
|
|
if (pmm) {
|
|
pmm->rgi[IMM_MONTHSTART] = 0;
|
|
pmm->rgi[IMM_YEARSTART ] = 0;
|
|
pmm->rgi[IMM_MONTHEND ] = 0;
|
|
pmm->rgi[IMM_YEAREND ] = 0;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
iWrite = iRead = 0;
|
|
for (;;)
|
|
{
|
|
TCHAR ch = pszBuf[iRead];
|
|
switch (ch)
|
|
{
|
|
// At end of string, terminate the output buffer and go home
|
|
case TEXT('\0'):
|
|
pszBuf[iWrite] = TEXT('\0');
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
// If we find a marker, eat it and remember its location
|
|
case IMM_MONTHSTART:
|
|
case IMM_YEARSTART:
|
|
case IMM_MONTHEND:
|
|
case IMM_YEAREND:
|
|
if (pmm)
|
|
pmm->rgi[ch] = iWrite;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
// Otherwise, just copy it to the output
|
|
default:
|
|
pszBuf[iWrite++] = ch;
|
|
#ifndef UNICODE
|
|
if (IsDBCSLeadByte(ch) && pszBuf[iRead+1]) {
|
|
pszBuf[iWrite++] = pszBuf[++iRead];
|
|
}
|
|
#endif
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
iRead++;
|
|
}
|
|
// NOTREACHED
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
////////////////////////////////////
|
|
//
|
|
// Like LocalizedLoadString, except that we get the string from
|
|
// LOCAL_USER_DEFAULT instead of GetUserDefaultUILanguage().
|
|
//
|
|
// LOCALE_USER_DEFAULT is the same as GetUserDefaultLCID(), and
|
|
// LANGIDFROMLCID(GetUserDefaultLCID()) is the same as GetUserDefaultLangID().
|
|
//
|
|
// So we pass GetUserDefaultLangID() as the language.
|
|
//
|
|
|
|
int MCLoadString(UINT uID, LPWSTR lpBuffer, int nBufferMax)
|
|
{
|
|
return CCLoadStringEx(uID, lpBuffer, nBufferMax, GetUserDefaultLangID());
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
////////////////////////////////////
|
|
//
|
|
// Get the localized calendar info
|
|
//
|
|
BOOL UpdateLocaleInfo(MONTHCAL* pmc, LPLOCALEINFO pli)
|
|
{
|
|
int i;
|
|
TCHAR szBuf[64];
|
|
int cch;
|
|
LPTSTR pc = szBuf;
|
|
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Get information about the calendar (e.g., is it supported?)
|
|
//
|
|
MCGetCalendarInfo(&pmc->ct);
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Check if the calendar title is an RTL string
|
|
//
|
|
GetDateFormat(pmc->ct.lcid, 0, NULL, TEXT("MMMM"), szBuf, ARRAYSIZE(szBuf));
|
|
pmc->fHeaderRTL = (WORD) MCIsDateStringRTL(szBuf[0]);
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// get the short date format and sniff it to see if it displays the year
|
|
// or month first
|
|
//
|
|
MCLoadString(IDS_MONTHFMT, pli->szMonthFmt, ARRAYSIZE(pli->szMonthFmt));
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Try to get the MONTHYEAR format from NLS. If not supported by NLS,
|
|
// then use the hard-coded value in our resources. Note that we
|
|
// subtract 4 from the buffer size because we may insert up to four
|
|
// marker characters.
|
|
//
|
|
COMPILETIME_ASSERT(ARRAYSIZE(szBuf) >= ARRAYSIZE(pli->szMonthYearFmt));
|
|
szBuf[0] = TEXT('\0');
|
|
|
|
GetLocaleInfo(pmc->ct.lcid, LOCALE_SYEARMONTH,
|
|
szBuf, ARRAYSIZE(pli->szMonthYearFmt) - CCH_MARKERS);
|
|
if (!szBuf[0]) {
|
|
MCLoadString(IDS_MONTHYEARFMT, szBuf, ARRAYSIZE(pli->szMonthYearFmt) - CCH_MARKERS);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
MCInsertMarkers(pli->szMonthYearFmt, szBuf);
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// BUGBUG - this code needs to change to use CAL_ values when we
|
|
// want to support multiple calendars.
|
|
//
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Get the month names
|
|
//
|
|
for (i = 0; i < 12; i++)
|
|
{
|
|
cch = GetLocaleInfo(pmc->ct.lcid, LOCALE_SMONTHNAME1 + i,
|
|
pli->rgszMonth[i], CCHMAXMONTH);
|
|
if (cch == 0)
|
|
// the calendar is pretty useless without month names...
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Get the days of the week
|
|
//
|
|
for (i = 0; i < 7; i++)
|
|
{
|
|
cch = GetLocaleInfo(LOCALE_USER_DEFAULT, LOCALE_SABBREVDAYNAME1 + i,
|
|
pli->rgszDay[i], CCHMAXABBREVDAY);
|
|
if (cch == 0)
|
|
// the calendar is pretty useless without day names...
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// If we haven't already set what the first day of the week is, get the
|
|
// localized setting.
|
|
//
|
|
if (!pmc->fFirstDowSet)
|
|
{
|
|
cch = GetLocaleInfo(pmc->ct.lcid, LOCALE_IFIRSTDAYOFWEEK, szBuf, ARRAYSIZE(szBuf));
|
|
if (cch > 0)
|
|
pli->dowStartWeek = szBuf[0] - TEXT('0');
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Get the first week of the year
|
|
//
|
|
cch = GetLocaleInfo(pmc->ct.lcid, LOCALE_IFIRSTWEEKOFYEAR, szBuf, ARRAYSIZE(szBuf));
|
|
if (cch > 0)
|
|
pli->firstWeek = szBuf[0] - TEXT('0');
|
|
|
|
// Set up pointers
|
|
for (i = 0; i < 12; i++)
|
|
pli->rgpszMonth[i] = pli->rgszMonth[i];
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; i < 7; i++)
|
|
pli->rgpszDay[i] = pli->rgszDay[i];
|
|
|
|
// Get static strings
|
|
MCLoadString(IDS_TODAY, pli->szToday, ARRAYSIZE(pli->szToday));
|
|
MCLoadString(IDS_GOTOTODAY, pli->szGoToToday, ARRAYSIZE(pli->szGoToToday));
|
|
|
|
// if we've been initialized
|
|
if (pmc->hinstance)
|
|
{
|
|
SYSTEMTIME st;
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->stMonthFirst, st);
|
|
MCUpdateStartEndDates(pmc, &st);
|
|
}
|
|
return(TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCReloadMenus(MONTHCAL *pmc)
|
|
{
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
if (pmc->hmenuCtxt)
|
|
DestroyMenu(pmc->hmenuCtxt);
|
|
if (pmc->hmenuMonth)
|
|
DestroyMenu(pmc->hmenuMonth);
|
|
|
|
pmc->hmenuCtxt = CreatePopupMenu();
|
|
if (pmc->hmenuCtxt)
|
|
AppendMenu(pmc->hmenuCtxt, MF_STRING, 1, pmc->li.szGoToToday);
|
|
|
|
pmc->hmenuMonth = CreatePopupMenu();
|
|
if (pmc->hmenuMonth)
|
|
{
|
|
for (i = 0; i < 12; i++)
|
|
AppendMenu(pmc->hmenuMonth, MF_STRING, i + 1, pmc->li.rgszMonth[i]);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
BOOL MCHandleEraseBkgnd(MONTHCAL* pmc, HDC hdc)
|
|
{
|
|
RECT rc;
|
|
|
|
GetClipBox(hdc, &rc);
|
|
FillRectClr(hdc, &rc, pmc->clr[MCSC_BACKGROUND]);
|
|
return TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
LRESULT MCHandleHitTest(MONTHCAL* pmc, PMCHITTESTINFO phti)
|
|
{
|
|
int iMonth;
|
|
RECT rc;
|
|
|
|
if (!phti || phti->cbSize != sizeof(MCHITTESTINFO))
|
|
return -1;
|
|
|
|
phti->uHit = MCHT_NOWHERE;
|
|
|
|
MCGetTodayBtnRect(pmc, &rc);
|
|
if (PtInRect(&rc, phti->pt) && MonthCal_ShowToday(pmc))
|
|
{
|
|
phti->uHit = MCHT_TODAYLINK;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (pmc->fSpinPrev = (WORD) PtInRect(&pmc->rcPrev, phti->pt))
|
|
{
|
|
phti->uHit = MCHT_TITLEBTNPREV;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (PtInRect(&pmc->rcNext, phti->pt))
|
|
{
|
|
phti->uHit = MCHT_TITLEBTNNEXT;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (FGetOffsetForPt(pmc, phti->pt, &iMonth))
|
|
{
|
|
RECT rcMonth; // bounding rect for month containg phti->pt
|
|
POINT ptRel; // relative point in a month
|
|
int month;
|
|
int year;
|
|
|
|
MCGetRcForMonth(pmc, iMonth, &rcMonth);
|
|
ptRel.x = phti->pt.x - rcMonth.left;
|
|
ptRel.y = phti->pt.y - rcMonth.top;
|
|
|
|
GetYrMoForOffset(pmc, iMonth, &year, &month);
|
|
phti->st.wMonth = (WORD) month;
|
|
phti->st.wYear = (WORD) year;
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// if calendar is showing week numbers and the point lies in the
|
|
// the week numbers, get the date for day immediately to the right
|
|
// of the week number containing the point
|
|
//
|
|
if (MonthCal_ShowWeekNumbers(pmc) && PtInRect(&pmc->rcWeekNum, ptRel))
|
|
{
|
|
phti->uHit |= MCHT_CALENDARWEEKNUM;
|
|
phti->pt.x += pmc->rcDayNum.left;
|
|
FGetDateForPt(pmc, phti->pt, &phti->st, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// if the point lies in the days of the week header, then return
|
|
// the day of the week containing the point
|
|
//
|
|
else if (PtInRect(&pmc->rcDow, ptRel))
|
|
{
|
|
int iRow;
|
|
int iCol;
|
|
|
|
phti->uHit |= MCHT_CALENDARDAY;
|
|
ptRel.y = pmc->rcDayNum.top;
|
|
FGetRowColForRelPt(pmc, ptRel, &iRow, &iCol);
|
|
phti->st.wDayOfWeek = (WORD) iCol;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// if the point lies in the actually calendar part, then return the
|
|
// date containg the point
|
|
//
|
|
else if (PtInRect(&pmc->rcDayNum, ptRel))
|
|
{
|
|
int iDay;
|
|
|
|
// we're in the calendar part!
|
|
phti->uHit |= MCHT_CALENDAR;
|
|
|
|
if (FGetDateForPt(pmc, phti->pt, &phti->st, &iDay, NULL, NULL, NULL))
|
|
{
|
|
phti->uHit |= MCHT_CALENDARDATE;
|
|
|
|
// if it was beyond the bounds of the days we're showing
|
|
// and also FGetDateForPt returns TRUE, then we're on the boundary
|
|
// of the displayed months
|
|
if (iDay <= 0)
|
|
{
|
|
phti->uHit |= MCHT_PREV;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (iDay > pmc->rgcDay[iMonth + 1])
|
|
{
|
|
phti->uHit |= MCHT_NEXT;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
RECT rcMonthTitle;
|
|
RECT rcYearTitle;
|
|
|
|
// otherwise we're in the title
|
|
|
|
phti->uHit |= MCHT_TITLE;
|
|
MCGetTitleRcsForOffset(pmc, iMonth, &rcMonthTitle, &rcYearTitle);
|
|
|
|
if (PtInRect(&rcMonthTitle, phti->pt))
|
|
{
|
|
phti->uHit |= MCHT_TITLEMONTH;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (PtInRect(&rcYearTitle, phti->pt))
|
|
{
|
|
phti->uHit |= MCHT_TITLEYEAR;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
DebugMsg(TF_MONTHCAL, TEXT("mc: Hittest returns : %d %d %d %d)"),
|
|
(int)phti->st.wDay,
|
|
(int)phti->st.wMonth,
|
|
(int)phti->st.wYear,
|
|
(int)phti->st.wDayOfWeek
|
|
);
|
|
|
|
return phti->uHit;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MonthCal_OnPaint(MONTHCAL *pmc, HDC hdc)
|
|
{
|
|
if (hdc)
|
|
{
|
|
MCPaint(pmc, hdc);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
PAINTSTRUCT ps;
|
|
hdc = BeginPaint(pmc->ci.hwnd, &ps);
|
|
MCPaint(pmc, hdc);
|
|
EndPaint(pmc->ci.hwnd, &ps);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
BOOL MCGetDateFormatWithTempYear(PCALENDARTYPE pct, SYSTEMTIME *pst, LPCTSTR pszFormat, UINT uYear, LPTSTR pszBuf, UINT cchBuf)
|
|
{
|
|
BOOL fRc;
|
|
WORD wYear = pst->wYear;
|
|
pst->wYear = (WORD)uYear;
|
|
fRc = GetDateFormat(pct->lcid, 0, pst, pszFormat, pszBuf, cchBuf);
|
|
if (!fRc)
|
|
{
|
|
// AIGH! I hate Feburary 29. In case we are Feb 29 1996 and the
|
|
// user changes to a non-leap year, force the day to something valid
|
|
// in February 1997 (or whatever year the user finally picked).
|
|
//
|
|
// We can't blindly smash the day to 1 because the era might change
|
|
// in the middle of the month.
|
|
WORD wDay = pst->wDay;
|
|
|
|
ASSERT(pst->wDay == 29);
|
|
pst->wDay = 28;
|
|
fRc = GetDateFormat(pct->lcid, 0, pst, pszFormat, pszBuf, cchBuf);
|
|
pst->wDay = wDay;
|
|
}
|
|
pst->wYear = wYear;
|
|
return fRc;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCUpdateEditYear(MONTHCAL *pmc)
|
|
{
|
|
TCHAR rgch[64];
|
|
|
|
ASSERT(pmc->hwndEdit);
|
|
|
|
EVAL(MCGetDateFormatWithTempYear(&pmc->ct, &pmc->st, TEXT("yyyy"), pmc->st.wYear, rgch, ARRAYSIZE(rgch)));
|
|
|
|
SendMessage(pmc->hwndEdit, WM_SETTEXT, 0, (LPARAM)rgch);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
LRESULT CALLBACK MonthCalWndProc(HWND hwnd, UINT uMsg, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
|
|
{
|
|
MONTHCAL *pmc;
|
|
LRESULT lres = 0;
|
|
|
|
if (uMsg == WM_NCCREATE)
|
|
return(MCNcCreateHandler(hwnd));
|
|
|
|
pmc = MonthCal_GetPtr(hwnd);
|
|
if (pmc == NULL)
|
|
return(DefWindowProc(hwnd, uMsg, wParam, lParam));
|
|
|
|
// Dispatch the various messages we can receive
|
|
switch (uMsg)
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
case WM_CREATE:
|
|
CCCreateWindow();
|
|
lres = MCCreateHandler(pmc, hwnd, (LPCREATESTRUCT)lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
HANDLE_MSG(pmc, WM_ERASEBKGND, MCHandleEraseBkgnd);
|
|
|
|
case WM_PRINTCLIENT:
|
|
case WM_PAINT:
|
|
MonthCal_OnPaint(pmc, (HDC)wParam);
|
|
return(0);
|
|
|
|
case WM_KEYDOWN:
|
|
MCHandleKeydown(pmc, wParam, lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_KEYUP:
|
|
switch (wParam)
|
|
{
|
|
case VK_CONTROL:
|
|
pmc->fControl = FALSE;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case VK_SHIFT:
|
|
pmc->fShift = FALSE;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
#if 0
|
|
case WM_CHAR:
|
|
MCHandleChar(pmc, wParam, lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
case WM_CONTEXTMENU:
|
|
MCContextMenu(pmc, wParam, lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_LBUTTONDOWN:
|
|
MCLButtonDown(pmc, wParam, lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_LBUTTONUP:
|
|
MCLButtonUp(pmc, wParam, lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_MOUSEMOVE:
|
|
MCMouseMove(pmc, wParam, lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_GETFONT:
|
|
lres = (LRESULT)pmc->hfont;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_SETFONT:
|
|
MCHandleSetFont(pmc, (HFONT)wParam, (BOOL)LOWORD(lParam));
|
|
MCSizeHandler(pmc, &pmc->rc);
|
|
MCUpdateMonthNamePos(pmc);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_TIMER:
|
|
MCHandleTimer(pmc, wParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_NCDESTROY:
|
|
CCDestroyWindow();
|
|
MCNcDestroyHandler(hwnd, pmc, wParam, lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_ENABLE:
|
|
{
|
|
BOOL fEnable = wParam ? TRUE:FALSE;
|
|
if (pmc->fEnabled != fEnable)
|
|
{
|
|
pmc->fEnabled = (WORD) fEnable;
|
|
InvalidateRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
case MCMP_WINDOWPOSCHANGED:
|
|
case WM_SIZE:
|
|
{
|
|
RECT rc;
|
|
|
|
if (uMsg==MCMP_WINDOWPOSCHANGED)
|
|
{
|
|
GetClientRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, &rc);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
rc.left = 0;
|
|
rc.top = 0;
|
|
rc.right = GET_X_LPARAM(lParam);
|
|
rc.bottom = GET_Y_LPARAM(lParam);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
lres = MCSizeHandler(pmc, &rc);
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
case WM_CANCELMODE:
|
|
PostMessage(pmc->ci.hwnd, WM_LBUTTONUP, 0, 0xFFFFFFFF);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_SYSCOLORCHANGE:
|
|
InitGlobalColors();
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_WININICHANGE:
|
|
InitGlobalMetrics(wParam);
|
|
|
|
if (lParam == 0 ||
|
|
#ifdef UNICODE_WIN9x
|
|
!lstrcmpiA((LPSTR)lParam, "Intl")
|
|
#else
|
|
!lstrcmpi((LPTSTR)lParam, TEXT("Intl"))
|
|
#endif
|
|
)
|
|
{
|
|
UpdateLocaleInfo(pmc, &pmc->li);
|
|
MCReloadMenus(pmc);
|
|
InvalidateRect(hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
wParam = 0; // force MCCalcSizes to happen
|
|
}
|
|
if (wParam == 0 || wParam == SPI_SETNONCLIENTMETRICS)
|
|
{
|
|
MCCalcSizes(pmc);
|
|
PostMessage(pmc->ci.hwnd, MCMP_WINDOWPOSCHANGED, 0, 0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_NOTIFYFORMAT:
|
|
return CIHandleNotifyFormat(&pmc->ci, lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_STYLECHANGING:
|
|
lres = MCOnStyleChanging(pmc, (UINT) wParam, (LPSTYLESTRUCT)lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_STYLECHANGED:
|
|
lres = MCOnStyleChanged(pmc, (UINT) wParam, (LPSTYLESTRUCT)lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_NOTIFY: {
|
|
LPNMHDR pnm = (LPNMHDR)lParam;
|
|
switch (pnm->code)
|
|
{
|
|
case UDN_DELTAPOS:
|
|
if (pnm->hwndFrom == pmc->hwndUD)
|
|
{
|
|
// A notification from the UpDown control buddied
|
|
// with the currently popped up monthcal, adjust the
|
|
// edit box appropriately. We use UDN_DELTAPOS instad
|
|
// of WM_VSCROLL because we care only about the delta and
|
|
// not the absolute number. The absolute number causes us
|
|
// problems in localized calendars.
|
|
LPNM_UPDOWN pnmdp = (LPNM_UPDOWN)lParam;
|
|
UINT yr = pmc->st.wYear + pnmdp->iDelta;
|
|
UINT yrMin, yrMax;
|
|
int delta;
|
|
|
|
yrMin = pmc->stMin.wYear;
|
|
if (yr < yrMin)
|
|
yr = yrMin;
|
|
|
|
yrMax = pmc->stMax.wYear;
|
|
if (yr > yrMax)
|
|
yr = yrMax;
|
|
|
|
delta = yr - pmc->st.wYear;
|
|
pmc->st.wYear = (WORD)yr;
|
|
if (delta) {
|
|
MCIncrStartMonth(pmc, delta * 12, FALSE);
|
|
MCNotifySelChange(pmc,MCN_SELCHANGE);
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
} // WM_NOTIFY switch
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_VSCROLL:
|
|
// this must be coming from our UpDown control buddied
|
|
// with the currently popped up monthcal, adjust the
|
|
// edit box appropriately
|
|
// We must do this on WM_VSCROLL rather than UDN_DELTAPOS
|
|
// since we need to fix the selection after the updown mangled it
|
|
MCUpdateEditYear(pmc);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// MONTHCAL specific messages
|
|
//
|
|
|
|
|
|
// MCM_GETCURSEL wParam=void lParam=LPSYSTEMTIME
|
|
// sets *lParam to the currently selected SYSTEMTIME
|
|
// returns TRUE on success, FALSE on error (such as multi-select MONTHCAL)
|
|
case MCM_GETCURSEL:
|
|
if (!MonthCal_IsMultiSelect(pmc))
|
|
{
|
|
LPSYSTEMTIME pst = (LPSYSTEMTIME)lParam;
|
|
if (pst)
|
|
{
|
|
ZeroMemory(pst, sizeof(SYSTEMTIME));
|
|
// BUGBUG raymondc v6. Need to zero out the time fields instead of
|
|
// setting them to garbage. This confuses MFC.
|
|
*pst = pmc->st;
|
|
pst->wDayOfWeek = (DowFromDate(pst)+1) % 7; // this returns 0==sun
|
|
lres = 1;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
// MCM_SETCURSEL wParam=void lParam=LPSYSTEMTIME
|
|
// sets the currently selected SYSTEMTIME to *lParam
|
|
// returns TRUE on success, FALSE on error (such as multi-select MONTHCAL or bad parameters)
|
|
case MCM_SETCURSEL:
|
|
{
|
|
LPSYSTEMTIME pst = (LPSYSTEMTIME)lParam;
|
|
|
|
if (MonthCal_IsMultiSelect(pmc) ||
|
|
!IsValidDate(pst))
|
|
{
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (0 == CmpDate(pst, &pmc->st))
|
|
{
|
|
// if no change, just return
|
|
lres = 1;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
pmc->rcDayOld = pmc->rcDayCur;
|
|
|
|
pmc->fNoNotify = TRUE;
|
|
lres = MCSetDate(pmc, pst);
|
|
pmc->fNoNotify = FALSE;
|
|
|
|
if (lres)
|
|
{
|
|
InvalidateRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, &pmc->rcDayOld, FALSE); // erase old highlight
|
|
InvalidateRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, &pmc->rcDayCur, FALSE); // draw new highlight
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
UpdateWindow(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// MCM_GETMAXSELCOUNT wParam=void lParam=void
|
|
// returns the max number of selected days allowed
|
|
case MCM_GETMAXSELCOUNT:
|
|
lres = (LRESULT)(MonthCal_IsMultiSelect(pmc) ? pmc->cSelMax : 1);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
// MCM_SETMAXSELCOUNT wParam=int lParam=void
|
|
// sets the maximum selectable date range to wParam days
|
|
// returns TRUE on success, FALSE on error (such as single-select MONTHCAL)
|
|
case MCM_SETMAXSELCOUNT:
|
|
if (!MonthCal_IsMultiSelect(pmc) || (int)wParam < 1)
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
pmc->cSelMax = (int)wParam;
|
|
lres = 1;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
// MCM_GETSELRANGE wParam=void lParam=LPSYSTEMTIME[2]
|
|
// sets *lParam to the first date of the range, *(lParam+1) to the second date
|
|
// returns TRUE on success, FALSE otherwise (such as single-select MONTHCAL)
|
|
case MCM_GETSELRANGE:
|
|
{
|
|
LPSYSTEMTIME pst;
|
|
|
|
pst = (LPSYSTEMTIME)lParam;
|
|
|
|
if (!pst)
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
ZeroMemory(pst, sizeof(SYSTEMTIME) * 2);
|
|
|
|
if (!MonthCal_IsMultiSelect(pmc))
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
*pst = pmc->st;
|
|
pst->wDayOfWeek = (DowFromDate(pst)+1) % 7; // this returns 0==sun
|
|
pst++;
|
|
*pst = pmc->stEndSel;
|
|
pst->wDayOfWeek = (DowFromDate(pst)+1) % 7; // this returns 0==sun
|
|
lres = 1;
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// MCM_SETSELRANGE wParam=void lParam=LPSYSTEMTIME[2]
|
|
// sets the currently selected day range to *lparam to *(lParam+1)
|
|
// returns TRUE on success, FALSE otherwise (such as single-select MONTHCAL or bad params)
|
|
case MCM_SETSELRANGE:
|
|
{
|
|
LPSYSTEMTIME pstStart = (LPSYSTEMTIME)lParam;
|
|
LPSYSTEMTIME pstEnd = &pstStart[1];
|
|
SYSTEMTIME stStart;
|
|
SYSTEMTIME stEnd;
|
|
|
|
if (!MonthCal_IsMultiSelect(pmc) ||
|
|
!IsValidDate(pstStart) ||
|
|
!IsValidDate(pstEnd))
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
// IE3 shipped without validating the time portion of this message.
|
|
// Make sure our stored systemtimes are always valid (so we will
|
|
// always give out valid systemtime structs).
|
|
//
|
|
if (!IsValidTime(pstStart))
|
|
CopyTime(pmc->st, *pstStart);
|
|
if (!IsValidTime(pstEnd))
|
|
CopyTime(pmc->stEndSel, *pstEnd);
|
|
|
|
if (CmpDate(pstStart, pstEnd) > 0)
|
|
{
|
|
stEnd = *pstStart;
|
|
stStart = *pstEnd;
|
|
pstStart = &stStart;
|
|
pstEnd = &stEnd;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (CmpDate(pstStart, &pmc->stMin) < 0)
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
if (CmpDate(pstEnd, &pmc->stMax) > 0)
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
if (DaysBetweenDates(pstStart, pstEnd) >= pmc->cSelMax)
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (0 == CmpDate(pstStart, &pmc->st) &&
|
|
0 == CmpDate(pstEnd, &pmc->stEndSel))
|
|
{
|
|
// if no change, just return
|
|
lres = 1;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
pmc->stStartPrev = pmc->st;
|
|
pmc->stEndPrev = pmc->stEndSel;
|
|
|
|
pmc->fNoNotify = TRUE;
|
|
|
|
lres = MCSetDate(pmc, pstEnd);
|
|
if (lres)
|
|
{
|
|
pmc->st = *pstStart;
|
|
pmc->stEndSel = *pstEnd;
|
|
|
|
MCInvalidateDates(pmc, &pmc->stStartPrev, &pmc->stEndPrev);
|
|
MCInvalidateDates(pmc, &pmc->st, &pmc->stEndSel);
|
|
UpdateWindow(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
pmc->fNoNotify = FALSE;
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// MCM_GETMONTHRANGE wParam=GMR_flags lParam=LPSYSTEMTIME[2]
|
|
// if GMR_VISIBLE, returns the range of selectable (non-grayed) displayed
|
|
// days. if GMR_DAYSTATE, returns the range of every (incl grayed) days.
|
|
// returns the number of months the above range spans.
|
|
case MCM_GETMONTHRANGE:
|
|
{
|
|
LPSYSTEMTIME pst = (LPSYSTEMTIME)lParam;
|
|
|
|
if (pst)
|
|
{
|
|
ZeroMemory(pst, 2 * sizeof(SYSTEMTIME));
|
|
|
|
if (wParam == GMR_VISIBLE)
|
|
{
|
|
pst[0] = pmc->stMonthFirst;
|
|
pst[1] = pmc->stMonthLast;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (wParam == GMR_DAYSTATE)
|
|
{
|
|
pst[0] = pmc->stViewFirst;
|
|
pst[1] = pmc->stViewLast;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
lres = (LRESULT)pmc->nMonths;
|
|
if (wParam == GMR_DAYSTATE)
|
|
lres += 2;
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// MCM_SETDAYSTATE wParam=int lParam=LPDAYSTATE
|
|
// updates the MONTHCAL's DAYSTATE, only for MONTHCALs with DAYSTATE enabled
|
|
// the range of months represented in the DAYSTATE array passed in lParam
|
|
// should match that of the MONTHCAL
|
|
// wParam count of items in DAYSTATE array
|
|
// lParam pointer to array of DAYSTATE items
|
|
// returns FALSE if not DAYSTATE enabled or if an error occurs, TRUE otherwise
|
|
case MCM_SETDAYSTATE:
|
|
{
|
|
MONTHDAYSTATE *pmds = (MONTHDAYSTATE *)lParam;
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
if (!MonthCal_IsDayState(pmc) ||
|
|
(int)wParam != (pmc->nMonths + 2))
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; i < (int)wParam; i++)
|
|
{
|
|
pmc->rgdayState[i] = *pmds;
|
|
pmds++;
|
|
}
|
|
MCInvalidateMonthDays(pmc);
|
|
lres = 1;
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// MCM_GETMINREQRECT wParam=void lParam=LPRECT
|
|
// sets *lParam to the minimum size required to display one month in full.
|
|
// Note: this is dependent upon the currently selected font.
|
|
// Apps can take the returned size and double the width to get two calendars
|
|
// displayed.
|
|
case MCM_GETMINREQRECT:
|
|
{
|
|
LPRECT prc = (LPRECT)lParam;
|
|
|
|
prc->left = 0;
|
|
prc->top = 0;
|
|
prc->right = pmc->dxMonth;
|
|
prc->bottom = pmc->dyMonth;
|
|
if (MonthCal_ShowToday(pmc))
|
|
{
|
|
prc->bottom += pmc->dyToday;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
AdjustWindowRect(prc, pmc->ci.style, FALSE);
|
|
|
|
// This is a bogus message, lParam should really be LPSIZE.
|
|
// Make sure left and top are 0 (AdjustWindowRect will make these negative).
|
|
prc->right -= prc->left;
|
|
prc->bottom -= prc->top;
|
|
prc->left = 0;
|
|
prc->top = 0;
|
|
|
|
lres = 1;
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// MCM_GETMAXTODAYWIDTH wParam=void lParam=LPDWORD
|
|
// sets *lParam to the width of the "today" string, so apps
|
|
// can figure out how big to make the calendar (max of MCM_GETMINREQRECT
|
|
// and MCM_GETMAXTODAYWIDTH).
|
|
case MCM_GETMAXTODAYWIDTH:
|
|
{
|
|
RECT rc;
|
|
|
|
rc.left = 0;
|
|
rc.top = 0;
|
|
rc.right = pmc->dxToday;
|
|
rc.bottom = pmc->dyToday;
|
|
|
|
AdjustWindowRect(&rc, pmc->ci.style, FALSE);
|
|
|
|
lres = rc.right - rc.left;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
case MCM_HITTEST:
|
|
return MCHandleHitTest(pmc, (PMCHITTESTINFO)lParam);
|
|
|
|
case MCM_SETCOLOR:
|
|
|
|
if (wParam < MCSC_COLORCOUNT)
|
|
{
|
|
COLORREF clr = pmc->clr[wParam];
|
|
pmc->clr[wParam] = (COLORREF)lParam;
|
|
InvalidateRect(hwnd, NULL, wParam == MCSC_BACKGROUND);
|
|
return clr;
|
|
}
|
|
return -1;
|
|
|
|
case MCM_GETCOLOR:
|
|
if (wParam < MCSC_COLORCOUNT)
|
|
return pmc->clr[wParam];
|
|
return -1;
|
|
|
|
case MCM_SETFIRSTDAYOFWEEK:
|
|
{
|
|
lres = MAKELONG(pmc->li.dowStartWeek, (BOOL)pmc->fFirstDowSet);
|
|
if (lParam == (LPARAM)-1) {
|
|
pmc->fFirstDowSet = FALSE;
|
|
} else if (lParam < 7) {
|
|
pmc->fFirstDowSet = TRUE;
|
|
pmc->li.dowStartWeek = (TCHAR)lParam;
|
|
}
|
|
UpdateLocaleInfo(pmc, &pmc->li);
|
|
InvalidateRect(hwnd, NULL, FALSE);
|
|
return lres;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
case MCM_GETFIRSTDAYOFWEEK:
|
|
return MAKELONG(pmc->li.dowStartWeek, (BOOL)pmc->fFirstDowSet);
|
|
|
|
case MCM_SETTODAY:
|
|
MCSetToday(pmc, (SYSTEMTIME*)lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case MCM_GETTODAY:
|
|
if (lParam) {
|
|
*((SYSTEMTIME*)lParam) = pmc->stToday;
|
|
return TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
return FALSE;
|
|
|
|
case MCM_GETRANGE:
|
|
if (lParam)
|
|
{
|
|
LPSYSTEMTIME pst = (LPSYSTEMTIME)lParam;
|
|
|
|
ZeroMemory(pst, sizeof(SYSTEMTIME)*2);
|
|
|
|
ASSERT(lres == 0);
|
|
if (pmc->fMinYrSet)
|
|
{
|
|
pst[0] = pmc->stMin;
|
|
lres = GDTR_MIN;
|
|
}
|
|
if (pmc->fMaxYrSet)
|
|
{
|
|
pst[1] = pmc->stMax;
|
|
lres |= GDTR_MAX;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case MCM_SETRANGE:
|
|
if (lParam)
|
|
{
|
|
LPSYSTEMTIME pst = (LPSYSTEMTIME)lParam;
|
|
|
|
if (((wParam & GDTR_MIN) && !IsValidDate(pst)) ||
|
|
((wParam & GDTR_MAX) && !IsValidDate(&pst[1])))
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
// IE3 did not validate the time portion of this struct
|
|
// use stToday time fields cuz pmc->stMin/Max may be zero
|
|
if ((wParam & GDTR_MIN) && !IsValidTime(pst))
|
|
CopyTime(pmc->stToday, pst[0]);
|
|
if ((wParam & GDTR_MAX) && !IsValidTime(&pst[1]))
|
|
CopyTime(pmc->stToday, pst[1]);
|
|
|
|
if (wParam & GDTR_MIN)
|
|
{
|
|
pmc->stMin = *pst;
|
|
pmc->fMinYrSet = TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
pmc->stMin = c_stEpoch;
|
|
pmc->fMinYrSet = FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
pst++;
|
|
if (wParam & GDTR_MAX)
|
|
{
|
|
pmc->stMax = *pst;
|
|
pmc->fMaxYrSet = TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
pmc->stMax = c_stArmageddon;
|
|
pmc->fMaxYrSet = FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (pmc->fMaxYrSet && pmc->fMinYrSet && CmpDate(&pmc->stMin, &pmc->stMax) > 0)
|
|
{
|
|
SYSTEMTIME stTemp = pmc->stMin;
|
|
pmc->stMin = pmc->stMax;
|
|
pmc->stMax = stTemp;
|
|
}
|
|
lres = TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case MCM_GETMONTHDELTA:
|
|
if (pmc->fMonthDelta)
|
|
lres = pmc->nMonthDelta;
|
|
else
|
|
lres = pmc->nMonths;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case MCM_SETMONTHDELTA:
|
|
if (pmc->fMonthDelta)
|
|
lres = pmc->nMonthDelta;
|
|
else
|
|
lres = 0;
|
|
if ((int)wParam==0)
|
|
pmc->fMonthDelta = FALSE;
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
pmc->fMonthDelta = TRUE;
|
|
pmc->nMonthDelta = (int)wParam;
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
if (CCWndProc(&pmc->ci, uMsg, wParam, lParam, &lres))
|
|
return lres;
|
|
|
|
lres = DefWindowProc(hwnd, uMsg, wParam, lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
} /* switch (uMsg) */
|
|
|
|
return(lres);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LRESULT MCNcCreateHandler(HWND hwnd)
|
|
{
|
|
MONTHCAL *pmc;
|
|
|
|
// Allocate storage for the dtpick structure
|
|
pmc = (MONTHCAL *)NearAlloc(sizeof(MONTHCAL));
|
|
if (!pmc)
|
|
{
|
|
DebugMsg(DM_WARNING, TEXT("mc: Out Of Near Memory"));
|
|
return(0L);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
MonthCal_SetPtr(hwnd, pmc);
|
|
|
|
return(1L);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCInitColorArray(COLORREF* pclr)
|
|
{
|
|
pclr[MCSC_BACKGROUND] = g_clrWindow;
|
|
pclr[MCSC_MONTHBK] = g_clrWindow;
|
|
pclr[MCSC_TEXT] = g_clrWindowText;
|
|
pclr[MCSC_TITLEBK] = GetSysColor(COLOR_ACTIVECAPTION);
|
|
pclr[MCSC_TITLETEXT] = GetSysColor(COLOR_CAPTIONTEXT);
|
|
pclr[MCSC_TRAILINGTEXT] = g_clrGrayText;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LRESULT MCCreateHandler(MONTHCAL *pmc, HWND hwnd, LPCREATESTRUCT lpcs)
|
|
{
|
|
HFONT hfont;
|
|
SYSTEMTIME st;
|
|
|
|
// Validate data
|
|
//
|
|
if (lpcs->style & MCS_INVALIDBITS)
|
|
return(-1);
|
|
|
|
CIInitialize(&pmc->ci, hwnd, lpcs);
|
|
UpdateLocaleInfo(pmc, &pmc->li);
|
|
|
|
// Initialize our data.
|
|
//
|
|
pmc->hinstance = lpcs->hInstance;
|
|
|
|
pmc->fEnabled = !(pmc->ci.style & WS_DISABLED);
|
|
|
|
pmc->hpenToday = CreatePen(PS_SOLID, 2, CAL_COLOR_TODAY);
|
|
|
|
MCReloadMenus(pmc);
|
|
|
|
// Default minimum date is the epoch
|
|
pmc->stMin = c_stEpoch;
|
|
|
|
// Default maximum date is armageddon
|
|
pmc->stMax = c_stArmageddon;
|
|
|
|
GetLocalTime(&pmc->stToday);
|
|
pmc->st = pmc->stToday;
|
|
if (MonthCal_IsMultiSelect(pmc))
|
|
pmc->stEndSel = pmc->st;
|
|
|
|
// make sure the time portions of these are valid. they are never
|
|
// touched after this point
|
|
pmc->stMonthFirst = pmc->st;
|
|
pmc->stMonthLast = pmc->st;
|
|
pmc->stViewFirst = pmc->st;
|
|
pmc->stViewLast = pmc->st;
|
|
|
|
pmc->cSelMax = CAL_DEF_SELMAX;
|
|
|
|
hfont = NULL;
|
|
if (lpcs->hwndParent)
|
|
hfont = (HFONT)SendMessage(lpcs->hwndParent, WM_GETFONT, 0, 0);
|
|
if (hfont == NULL)
|
|
hfont = (HFONT)GetStockObject(DEFAULT_GUI_FONT);
|
|
MCHandleSetFont(pmc, hfont, FALSE);
|
|
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->st, st);
|
|
// Can we start at January?
|
|
if (st.wMonth <= (pmc->nViewRows * pmc->nViewCols))
|
|
st.wMonth = 1;
|
|
|
|
MCUpdateStartEndDates(pmc, &st);
|
|
|
|
pmc->idTimerToday = SetTimer(pmc->ci.hwnd, CAL_TODAYTIMER, CAL_SECTODAYTIMER * 1000, NULL);
|
|
|
|
MCInitColorArray(pmc->clr);
|
|
|
|
return(0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LRESULT MCOnStyleChanging(MONTHCAL *pmc, UINT gwl, LPSTYLESTRUCT pinfo)
|
|
{
|
|
if (gwl == GWL_STYLE)
|
|
{
|
|
DWORD changeFlags = pmc->ci.style ^ pinfo->styleNew;
|
|
|
|
// Don't allow these bits to change
|
|
changeFlags &= MCS_MULTISELECT | MCS_DAYSTATE | MCS_INVALIDBITS;
|
|
|
|
pinfo->styleNew ^= changeFlags;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return(0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LRESULT MCOnStyleChanged(MONTHCAL *pmc, UINT gwl, LPSTYLESTRUCT pinfo)
|
|
{
|
|
if (gwl == GWL_STYLE)
|
|
{
|
|
DWORD changeFlags = pmc->ci.style ^ pinfo->styleNew;
|
|
|
|
ASSERT(!(changeFlags & (MCS_MULTISELECT|MCS_DAYSTATE|MCS_INVALIDBITS)));
|
|
|
|
pmc->ci.style = pinfo->styleNew;
|
|
|
|
if (changeFlags & MCS_WEEKNUMBERS)
|
|
{
|
|
MCCalcSizes(pmc);
|
|
MCUpdateRcDayCur(pmc, &pmc->st);
|
|
//MCUpdateToday(pmc);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// save a touch of code and share the MCUpdateToday
|
|
// call with MCS_WEEKNUMBERS above
|
|
if (changeFlags & MCS_NOTODAY|MCS_NOTODAYCIRCLE|MCS_WEEKNUMBERS)
|
|
{
|
|
MCUpdateToday(pmc);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (changeFlags & (WS_BORDER | WS_CAPTION | WS_THICKFRAME)) {
|
|
// the changing of these bits affect the size of the window
|
|
// but not until after this message is handled
|
|
// so post ourself a message.
|
|
PostMessage(pmc->ci.hwnd, MCMP_WINDOWPOSCHANGED, 0, 0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (changeFlags)
|
|
InvalidateRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (gwl == GWL_EXSTYLE)
|
|
{
|
|
if ((pinfo->styleOld ^ pinfo->styleNew) & RTL_MIRRORED_WINDOW)
|
|
{
|
|
MCUpdateMonthNamePos(pmc);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return(0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCCalcSizes(MONTHCAL *pmc)
|
|
{
|
|
HDC hdc;
|
|
HFONT hfontOrig;
|
|
int i, dxMax, dyMax, dxExtra;
|
|
RECT rect;
|
|
TCHAR szBuf[128];
|
|
TCHAR szDateFmt[64];
|
|
|
|
// get sizing info for bold font...
|
|
hdc = GetDC(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
hfontOrig = SelectObject(hdc, (HGDIOBJ)pmc->hfontBold);
|
|
|
|
MGetTextExtent(hdc, g_szTextExtentDef, 2, &dxMax, &dyMax);
|
|
MGetTextExtent(hdc, g_szTextExtentDef, 4, &pmc->dxYearMax, NULL);
|
|
|
|
GetDateFormat(pmc->ct.lcid, DATE_SHORTDATE, &pmc->stToday,
|
|
NULL, szDateFmt, sizeof(szDateFmt));
|
|
wsprintf(szBuf,TEXT("%s %s"),pmc->li.szToday,szDateFmt);
|
|
MGetTextExtent(hdc, szBuf, -1, &pmc->dxToday, &pmc->dyToday);
|
|
// BUGBUG raymondc - hard-coded numbers are accessibility-incompatible
|
|
pmc->dyToday += 4;
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Cache these values so we don't go wacko if the app fails to
|
|
// forward WM_WININCHANGE messages into us and the user changes
|
|
// scrollbar widths. We'll draw with the wrong width, but at
|
|
// least they will be consistently wrong.
|
|
//
|
|
pmc->dxArrowMargin = DX_ARROWMARGIN;
|
|
pmc->dxCalArrow = DX_CALARROW;
|
|
pmc->dyCalArrow = DY_CALARROW;
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// The banner bar consists of
|
|
//
|
|
// margin + scrollbutton + spacer +
|
|
// MonthName yyyy +
|
|
// + spacer + scrollbutton + margin
|
|
//
|
|
// Margin is dxArrowMargin
|
|
//
|
|
// Scrollbutton = dxCalArrow
|
|
//
|
|
// Spacer = border + CXVSCROLL + border
|
|
//
|
|
// The spacer needs to be large enough for us to insert an updown
|
|
// control when it comes time to spin the year. We don't need to
|
|
// cache the spacer anywhere - its value is implicit from the others.
|
|
//
|
|
// The actual width is divided by the number of columns we need
|
|
// (typically 7, but perhaps 8 if we are also displaying week numbers).
|
|
//
|
|
// We round the division down - later, we'll add some random futz
|
|
// to compensate.
|
|
//
|
|
dxExtra = pmc->dxArrowMargin + pmc->dxCalArrow +
|
|
(g_cxBorder + g_cxVScroll + g_cxBorder);
|
|
dxExtra = dxExtra + dxExtra; // left + right
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; i < 12; i++)
|
|
{
|
|
int dxTemp;
|
|
|
|
// BUGBUG raymondc - not localization safe for languages which change
|
|
// month forms based on context
|
|
wsprintf(szBuf,TEXT("%s %s"),pmc->li.rgszMonth[i],g_szTextExtentDef);
|
|
|
|
MGetTextExtent(hdc, szBuf, -1, &dxTemp, NULL);
|
|
dxTemp += dxExtra;
|
|
dxTemp = dxTemp / (CALCOLMAX + (MonthCal_ShowWeekNumbers(pmc) ? 1:0));
|
|
if (dxTemp > dxMax)
|
|
dxMax = dxTemp;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
SelectObject(hdc, (HGDIOBJ)pmc->hfont);
|
|
for (i = 0; i < 7; i++)
|
|
{
|
|
SIZE size;
|
|
MGetTextExtent(hdc, pmc->li.rgszDay[i], -1, (LPINT)&size.cx, (LPINT)&size.cy);
|
|
if (size.cx > dxMax)
|
|
dxMax = size.cx;
|
|
if (size.cy > dyMax)
|
|
dyMax = size.cy;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (dyMax < pmc->dyCalArrow / 2)
|
|
dyMax = pmc->dyCalArrow / 2;
|
|
|
|
SelectObject(hdc, (HGDIOBJ)hfontOrig);
|
|
ReleaseDC(pmc->ci.hwnd, hdc);
|
|
|
|
pmc->dxCol = dxMax + 2;
|
|
pmc->dyRow = dyMax + 2;
|
|
pmc->dxMonth = pmc->dxCol * (CALCOLMAX + (MonthCal_ShowWeekNumbers(pmc) ? 1:0)) + 1;
|
|
pmc->dyMonth = pmc->dyRow * (CALROWMAX + 3) + 1; // we add 2 for the month name and day names
|
|
|
|
pmc->dxToday += pmc->dxCol+6+CALBORDER; // +2 for -1 at ends and 4 for shift of circle
|
|
if (pmc->dxMonth > pmc->dxToday)
|
|
pmc->dxToday = pmc->dxMonth;
|
|
|
|
// Space for month name (tile bar area of each month)
|
|
pmc->rcMonthName.left = 0;
|
|
pmc->rcMonthName.top = 0;
|
|
pmc->rcMonthName.right = pmc->dxMonth;
|
|
pmc->rcMonthName.bottom = pmc->rcMonthName.top + (pmc->dyRow * 2);
|
|
|
|
// Space for day-of-week
|
|
pmc->rcDow.left = 0;
|
|
pmc->rcDow.top = pmc->rcMonthName.bottom;
|
|
pmc->rcDow.right = pmc->dxMonth;
|
|
pmc->rcDow.bottom = pmc->rcDow.top + pmc->dyRow;
|
|
|
|
// Space for week numbers
|
|
if (MonthCal_ShowWeekNumbers(pmc))
|
|
{
|
|
pmc->rcWeekNum.left = pmc->rcDow.left;
|
|
pmc->rcWeekNum.top = pmc->rcDow.bottom;
|
|
pmc->rcWeekNum.right = pmc->rcWeekNum.left + pmc->dxCol;
|
|
pmc->rcWeekNum.bottom = pmc->dyMonth;
|
|
|
|
pmc->rcDow.left += pmc->dxCol; // shift days of week
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Space for the day numbers
|
|
pmc->rcDayNum.left = pmc->rcDow.left;
|
|
pmc->rcDayNum.top = pmc->rcDow.bottom;
|
|
pmc->rcDayNum.right = pmc->rcDayNum.left + (CALCOLMAX * pmc->dxCol);
|
|
pmc->rcDayNum.bottom = pmc->dyMonth;
|
|
|
|
GetClientRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, &rect);
|
|
|
|
MCRecomputeSizing(pmc, &rect);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCHandleSetFont(MONTHCAL *pmc, HFONT hfont, BOOL fRedraw)
|
|
{
|
|
LOGFONT lf;
|
|
HFONT hfontBold;
|
|
|
|
if (hfont == NULL)
|
|
hfont = (HFONT)GetStockObject(SYSTEM_FONT);
|
|
|
|
GetObject(hfont, sizeof(LOGFONT), (LPVOID)&lf);
|
|
// we want to make sure that the bold days are obviously different
|
|
// from the non-bold days...
|
|
lf.lfWeight = (lf.lfWeight >= 700 ? 1000 : 800);
|
|
hfontBold = CreateFontIndirect(&lf);
|
|
|
|
if (hfontBold == NULL)
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
if (pmc->hfontBold)
|
|
DeleteObject((HGDIOBJ)pmc->hfontBold);
|
|
|
|
pmc->hfont = hfont;
|
|
pmc->hfontBold = hfontBold;
|
|
pmc->ci.uiCodePage = GetCodePageForFont(hfont);
|
|
|
|
// calculate the new row and column sizes
|
|
MCCalcSizes(pmc);
|
|
|
|
if (fRedraw)
|
|
{
|
|
InvalidateRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
UpdateWindow(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
#if 0 // why is this here? it's not called anywhere??
|
|
|
|
// Stolen from the windows tips help file
|
|
void DrawTransparentBitmap(HDC hdc, HBITMAP hbmp, RECT *prc, COLORREF cTransparentColor)
|
|
{
|
|
COLORREF cColor;
|
|
BITMAP bm;
|
|
HBITMAP hbmAndBack, hbmAndObject, hbmAndMem, hbmSave;
|
|
HGDIOBJ hbmBackOld, hbmObjectOld, hbmMemOld, hbmSaveOld;
|
|
HDC hdcMem, hdcBack, hdcObject, hdcTemp, hdcSave;
|
|
POINT ptSize;
|
|
int d;
|
|
|
|
hdcTemp = CreateCompatibleDC(hdc);
|
|
SelectObject(hdcTemp, (HGDIOBJ)hbmp); // Select the bitmap
|
|
|
|
GetObject(hbmp, sizeof(BITMAP), &bm);
|
|
ptSize.x = bm.bmWidth; // Get width of bitmap
|
|
ptSize.y = bm.bmHeight; // Get height of bitmap
|
|
DPtoLP(hdcTemp, &ptSize, 1); // Convert from device to logical points
|
|
|
|
d = prc->right - prc->left;
|
|
if (d < ptSize.x)
|
|
ptSize.x = d;
|
|
d = prc->bottom - prc->top;
|
|
if (d < ptSize.y)
|
|
ptSize.y = d;
|
|
|
|
// Create some DCs to hold temporary data.
|
|
hdcBack = CreateCompatibleDC(hdc);
|
|
hdcObject = CreateCompatibleDC(hdc);
|
|
hdcMem = CreateCompatibleDC(hdc);
|
|
hdcSave = CreateCompatibleDC(hdc);
|
|
|
|
// Create a bitmap for each DC. DCs are required for a number of
|
|
// GDI functions.
|
|
|
|
// Monochrome DC
|
|
hbmAndBack = CreateBitmap(ptSize.x, ptSize.y, 1, 1, NULL);
|
|
|
|
// Monochrome DC
|
|
hbmAndObject = CreateBitmap(ptSize.x, ptSize.y, 1, 1, NULL);
|
|
|
|
hbmAndMem = CreateCompatibleBitmap(hdc, ptSize.x, ptSize.y);
|
|
hbmSave = CreateCompatibleBitmap(hdc, ptSize.x, ptSize.y);
|
|
|
|
// Each DC must select a bitmap object to store pixel data.
|
|
hbmBackOld = SelectObject(hdcBack, (HGDIOBJ)hbmAndBack);
|
|
hbmObjectOld = SelectObject(hdcObject, (HGDIOBJ)hbmAndObject);
|
|
hbmMemOld = SelectObject(hdcMem, (HGDIOBJ)hbmAndMem);
|
|
hbmSaveOld = SelectObject(hdcSave, (HGDIOBJ)hbmSave);
|
|
|
|
// Set proper mapping mode.
|
|
SetMapMode(hdcTemp, GetMapMode(hdc));
|
|
|
|
// Save the bitmap sent here, because it will be overwritten.
|
|
BitBlt(hdcSave, 0, 0, ptSize.x, ptSize.y, hdcTemp, 0, 0, SRCCOPY);
|
|
|
|
// Set the background color of the source DC to the color.
|
|
// contained in the parts of the bitmap that should be transparent
|
|
cColor = SetBkColor(hdcTemp, cTransparentColor);
|
|
|
|
// Create the object mask for the bitmap by performing a BitBlt
|
|
// from the source bitmap to a monochrome bitmap.
|
|
BitBlt(hdcObject, 0, 0, ptSize.x, ptSize.y, hdcTemp, 0, 0, SRCCOPY);
|
|
|
|
// Set the background color of the source DC back to the original
|
|
// color.
|
|
SetBkColor(hdcTemp, cColor);
|
|
|
|
// Create the inverse of the object mask.
|
|
BitBlt(hdcBack, 0, 0, ptSize.x, ptSize.y, hdcObject, 0, 0, NOTSRCCOPY);
|
|
|
|
// Copy the background of the main DC to the destination.
|
|
BitBlt(hdcMem, 0, 0, ptSize.x, ptSize.y, hdc, prc->left, prc->top, SRCCOPY);
|
|
|
|
// Mask out the places where the bitmap will be placed.
|
|
BitBlt(hdcMem, 0, 0, ptSize.x, ptSize.y, hdcObject, 0, 0, SRCAND);
|
|
|
|
// Mask out the transparent colored pixels on the bitmap.
|
|
BitBlt(hdcTemp, 0, 0, ptSize.x, ptSize.y, hdcBack, 0, 0, SRCAND);
|
|
|
|
// XOR the bitmap with the background on the destination DC.
|
|
BitBlt(hdcMem, 0, 0, ptSize.x, ptSize.y, hdcTemp, 0, 0, SRCPAINT);
|
|
|
|
// Copy the destination to the screen.
|
|
BitBlt(hdc, prc->left, prc->top, ptSize.x, ptSize.y, hdcMem, 0, 0, SRCCOPY);
|
|
|
|
// Place the original bitmap back into the bitmap sent here.
|
|
BitBlt(hdcTemp, 0, 0, ptSize.x, ptSize.y, hdcSave, 0, 0, SRCCOPY);
|
|
|
|
// Delete the memory bitmaps.
|
|
SelectObject(hdcBack, hbmBackOld);
|
|
DeleteObject(hbmAndBack);
|
|
SelectObject(hdcObject, hbmObjectOld);
|
|
DeleteObject(hbmAndObject);
|
|
SelectObject(hdcMem, hbmMemOld);
|
|
DeleteObject(hbmAndMem);
|
|
SelectObject(hdcSave, hbmSaveOld);
|
|
DeleteObject(hbmSave);
|
|
|
|
// Delete the memory DCs.
|
|
DeleteDC(hdcMem);
|
|
DeleteDC(hdcBack);
|
|
DeleteDC(hdcObject);
|
|
DeleteDC(hdcSave);
|
|
DeleteDC(hdcTemp);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
#endif // DEAD CODE
|
|
|
|
void MCDrawTodayCircle(MONTHCAL *pmc, HDC hdc, RECT *prc)
|
|
{
|
|
HGDIOBJ hpenOld;
|
|
int xBegin, yBegin, yEnd;
|
|
|
|
xBegin = (prc->right - prc->left) / 2 + prc->left;
|
|
yBegin = prc->top + 4;
|
|
yEnd = (prc->bottom - prc->top) / 2 + prc->top;
|
|
|
|
hpenOld = SelectObject(hdc, (HGDIOBJ)pmc->hpenToday);
|
|
Arc(hdc, prc->left + 1, yBegin, prc->right, prc->bottom,
|
|
xBegin, yBegin, prc->right, yEnd);
|
|
Arc(hdc, prc->left - 10, prc->top + 1, prc->right, prc->bottom,
|
|
prc->right, yEnd, prc->left + 3, yBegin);
|
|
SelectObject(hdc, hpenOld);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCInvalidateMonthDays(MONTHCAL *pmc)
|
|
{
|
|
InvalidateRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, &pmc->rcCentered, FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCGetTodayBtnRect(MONTHCAL *pmc, RECT *prc)
|
|
{
|
|
if (pmc->dxToday > pmc->rcCentered.right - pmc->rcCentered.left)
|
|
{
|
|
prc->left = pmc->rc.left + 1;
|
|
prc->right = pmc->rc.right - 1;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
prc->left = pmc->rcCentered.left + 1;
|
|
prc->right = pmc->rcCentered.right - 1;
|
|
}
|
|
prc->top = pmc->rcCentered.bottom - pmc->dyToday;
|
|
prc->bottom = pmc->rcCentered.bottom;
|
|
|
|
// center the today rect when we only have 1 col and it will fit in window
|
|
if ((pmc->nViewCols == 1) && (pmc->dxToday <= pmc->rc.right - pmc->rc.left))
|
|
{
|
|
int dx = ((pmc->rcCentered.right - pmc->rcCentered.left) - pmc->dxToday) / 2 - 1;
|
|
prc->left += dx;
|
|
prc->right -= dx;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCPaintArrowBtn(MONTHCAL *pmc, HDC hdc, BOOL fPrev, BOOL fPressed)
|
|
{
|
|
LPRECT prc;
|
|
UINT dfcs;
|
|
BOOL bMirrored = FALSE;
|
|
|
|
// This is to work around DrawFrameControl() mirroring bug fixed on W2k (bld 2042 or higher)
|
|
#ifndef WINNT
|
|
bMirrored = IS_DC_RTL_MIRRORED(hdc);
|
|
#endif // WINNT
|
|
|
|
if (fPrev)
|
|
{
|
|
if(bMirrored)
|
|
{
|
|
dfcs = DFCS_SCROLLRIGHT;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
dfcs = DFCS_SCROLLLEFT;
|
|
}
|
|
prc = &pmc->rcPrev;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
if(bMirrored)
|
|
{
|
|
dfcs = DFCS_SCROLLLEFT;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
dfcs = DFCS_SCROLLRIGHT;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
prc = &pmc->rcNext;
|
|
}
|
|
if (pmc->fEnabled)
|
|
{
|
|
if (fPressed)
|
|
{
|
|
dfcs |= DFCS_PUSHED | DFCS_FLAT;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
dfcs |= DFCS_INACTIVE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
DrawFrameControl(hdc, prc, DFC_SCROLL, dfcs);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCPaint(MONTHCAL *pmc, HDC hdc)
|
|
{
|
|
RECT rc, rcT;
|
|
int irow, icol, iMonth, iYear, iIndex, dx, dy;
|
|
HBRUSH hbrSelect;
|
|
HGDIOBJ hgdiOrig, hpenOrig;
|
|
|
|
pmc->hpen = CreatePen(PS_SOLID, 0, pmc->clr[MCSC_TEXT]);
|
|
hbrSelect = CreateSolidBrush(pmc->clr[MCSC_TITLEBK]);
|
|
|
|
SetBkMode(hdc, TRANSPARENT);
|
|
SetTextColor(hdc, pmc->clr[MCSC_TEXT]);
|
|
hpenOrig = SelectObject(hdc, GetStockObject(BLACK_PEN));
|
|
|
|
rc = pmc->rcCentered;
|
|
|
|
FillRectClr(hdc, &rc, pmc->clr[MCSC_MONTHBK]);
|
|
|
|
SelectObject(hdc, (HGDIOBJ)pmc->hpen);
|
|
|
|
// get the place for top left month
|
|
rc.left = pmc->rcCentered.left;
|
|
rc.right = rc.left + pmc->dxMonth;
|
|
rc.top = pmc->rcCentered.top;
|
|
rc.bottom = rc.top + pmc->dyMonth;
|
|
|
|
iMonth = pmc->stMonthFirst.wMonth;
|
|
iYear = pmc->stMonthFirst.wYear;
|
|
|
|
dx = pmc->dxMonth + CALBORDER;
|
|
dy = pmc->dyMonth + CALBORDER;
|
|
|
|
iIndex = 0;
|
|
for (irow = 0; irow < pmc->nViewRows; irow++)
|
|
{
|
|
rcT = rc;
|
|
for (icol = 0; icol < pmc->nViewCols; icol++)
|
|
{
|
|
if (RectVisible(hdc, &rcT))
|
|
{
|
|
MCPaintMonth(pmc, hdc, &rcT, iMonth, iYear, iIndex,
|
|
iIndex == 0,
|
|
iIndex == (pmc->nMonths - 1), hbrSelect);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
rcT.left += dx;
|
|
rcT.right += dx;
|
|
|
|
if (++iMonth > 12)
|
|
{
|
|
iMonth = 1;
|
|
iYear++;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
iIndex++;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
rc.top += dy;
|
|
rc.bottom += dy;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// draw the today stuff
|
|
if (MonthCal_ShowToday(pmc))
|
|
{
|
|
MCGetTodayBtnRect(pmc, &rc);
|
|
if (RectVisible(hdc, &rc))
|
|
{
|
|
TCHAR szDateFmt[32];
|
|
TCHAR szBuf[64];
|
|
|
|
rcT.right = rc.left + 2; // a bit extra border space
|
|
|
|
if (MonthCal_ShowTodayCircle(pmc)) // this turns on/off the red circle
|
|
{
|
|
rcT.left = rcT.right + 2;
|
|
rcT.right = rcT.left + pmc->dxCol - 2;
|
|
rcT.top = rc.top + 2;
|
|
rcT.bottom = rc.bottom - 2;
|
|
MCDrawTodayCircle(pmc, hdc, &rcT);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
rcT.left = rcT.right + 2;
|
|
rcT.right = rc.right - 2;
|
|
rcT.top = rc.top;
|
|
rcT.bottom = rc.bottom;
|
|
hgdiOrig = SelectObject(hdc, (HGDIOBJ)pmc->hfontBold);
|
|
SetTextColor(hdc, pmc->clr[MCSC_TEXT]);
|
|
|
|
GetDateFormat(pmc->ct.lcid, DATE_SHORTDATE, &pmc->stToday,
|
|
NULL, szDateFmt, sizeof(szDateFmt));
|
|
wsprintf(szBuf, TEXT("%s %s"), pmc->li.szToday, szDateFmt);
|
|
DrawText(hdc, szBuf, lstrlen(szBuf), &rcT,
|
|
DT_LEFT | DT_NOCLIP | DT_NOPREFIX | DT_SINGLELINE | DT_VCENTER);
|
|
|
|
SelectObject(hdc, hgdiOrig);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Draw the spin buttons
|
|
if (RectVisible(hdc, &pmc->rcPrev))
|
|
MCPaintArrowBtn(pmc, hdc, TRUE, (pmc->idTimer && pmc->fSpinPrev));
|
|
if (RectVisible(hdc, &pmc->rcNext))
|
|
MCPaintArrowBtn(pmc, hdc, FALSE, (pmc->idTimer && !pmc->fSpinPrev));
|
|
|
|
SelectObject(hdc, hpenOrig);
|
|
|
|
DeleteObject((HGDIOBJ)hbrSelect);
|
|
DeleteObject((HGDIOBJ)pmc->hpen);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// MCGetMonthFormat gets the string to display for the month/year
|
|
// in the passed-in SYSTEMTIME. This is tricky because of eras.
|
|
// If pmm is non-NULL, it receives the metrics of the
|
|
// formatted month/year string.
|
|
//
|
|
void MCGetMonthFormat(MONTHCAL *pmc, SYSTEMTIME *pst, LPTSTR rgch, UINT cch, PMONTHMETRICS pmm)
|
|
{
|
|
// For all months, we display the name appropriate to the first
|
|
// day of the month. Note that this means that the title of the
|
|
// month in which the era changes may be confusing. If the era
|
|
// changes in the middle of a month, we name the month after the
|
|
// previous era, even if the current selection belongs to the next
|
|
// era. I hope nobody will mind.
|
|
|
|
#if 0 // code that tried to track the era based on where the selection is
|
|
// but before you can turn this on, you have to find everybody who
|
|
// changes the selection, and that's hard because the monthcal control
|
|
// doesn't have a centralizesd selection changer; people just party on
|
|
// the selection directly
|
|
if (pst->wMonth == pmc->st.wMonth &&
|
|
pst->wYear == pmc->st.wYear) {
|
|
pst->wDay = pmc->st.wDay;
|
|
} else {
|
|
pst->wDay = 1;
|
|
}
|
|
#else
|
|
pst->wDay = 1;
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Get the string (all marked up), then extract the markers
|
|
// to locate the month and year substrings.
|
|
//
|
|
|
|
rgch[0] = TEXT('\0'); // In case something horrible happens
|
|
GetDateFormat(pmc->ct.lcid, 0, pst,
|
|
pmc->li.szMonthYearFmt,
|
|
rgch, cch);
|
|
MCRemoveMarkers(rgch, pmm);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCPaintMonth(MONTHCAL *pmc, HDC hdc, RECT *prc, int iMonth, int iYear, int iIndex,
|
|
BOOL fDrawPrev, BOOL fDrawNext, HBRUSH hbrSelect)
|
|
{
|
|
BOOL fBold, fView, fReset;
|
|
RECT rc, rcT;
|
|
int nDay, cdy, irow, icol, crowShow, nweek, isel;
|
|
TCHAR rgch[64];
|
|
LPTSTR psz;
|
|
HGDIOBJ hfontOrig, hbrushOld;
|
|
COLORREF clrGrayText, clrHiliteText, clrOld, clrText;
|
|
SYSTEMTIME st = {0};
|
|
int iIndexSave = iIndex;
|
|
|
|
clrText = pmc->clr[MCSC_TEXT];
|
|
clrGrayText = pmc->clr[MCSC_TRAILINGTEXT];
|
|
clrHiliteText = pmc->clr[MCSC_TITLETEXT];
|
|
|
|
hfontOrig = SelectObject(hdc, (HGDIOBJ)pmc->hfont);
|
|
SelectObject(hdc, (HGDIOBJ)pmc->hpen);
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Draw the Month and Year
|
|
//
|
|
// translate the relative coords to window coords
|
|
rc = pmc->rcMonthName;
|
|
rc.left += prc->left;
|
|
rc.right += prc->left;
|
|
rc.top += prc->top;
|
|
rc.bottom += prc->top;
|
|
if (RectVisible(hdc, &rc))
|
|
{
|
|
FillRectClr(hdc, &rc, pmc->clr[MCSC_TITLEBK]);
|
|
|
|
SetTextColor(hdc, pmc->clr[MCSC_TITLETEXT]);
|
|
SelectObject(hdc, (HGDIOBJ)pmc->hfontBold);
|
|
|
|
st.wYear = (WORD) iYear;
|
|
st.wMonth = (WORD) iMonth;
|
|
MCGetMonthFormat(pmc, &st, rgch, ARRAYSIZE(rgch), NULL);
|
|
|
|
DrawText(hdc, rgch, lstrlen(rgch), &rc, DT_CENTER | DT_NOCLIP | DT_NOPREFIX | DT_SINGLELINE | DT_VCENTER);
|
|
|
|
#ifdef MARKER_DEBUG
|
|
//
|
|
// When debugging MCInsertMarker and MCRemoveMarker, draw colored
|
|
// bars where we think the markers were.
|
|
//
|
|
{ RECT rcT = rc;
|
|
rcT.top = rcT.bottom - 2;
|
|
rcT.left = rc.left + pmc->rgmm[iIndex].rgi[IMM_MONTHSTART];
|
|
rcT.right = rc.left + pmc->rgmm[iIndex].rgi[IMM_MONTHEND];
|
|
FillRectClr(hdc, &rcT, RGB(0xFF, 0, 0));
|
|
|
|
rcT.left = rc.left + pmc->rgmm[iIndex].rgi[IMM_YEARSTART];
|
|
rcT.right = rc.left + pmc->rgmm[iIndex].rgi[IMM_YEAREND];
|
|
FillRectClr(hdc, &rcT, RGB(0, 0xFF, 0));
|
|
}
|
|
#endif
|
|
SelectObject(hdc, (HGDIOBJ)pmc->hfont);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
SetTextColor(hdc, pmc->clr[MCSC_TITLEBK]);
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Draw the days of the month
|
|
//
|
|
// translate the relative coords to window coords
|
|
rc = pmc->rcDow;
|
|
rc.left += prc->left;
|
|
rc.right += prc->left;
|
|
rc.top += prc->top;
|
|
rc.bottom += prc->top;
|
|
if (RectVisible(hdc, &rc))
|
|
{
|
|
MoveToEx(hdc, rc.left + 4, rc.bottom - 1, NULL);
|
|
LineTo(hdc, rc.right - 4, rc.bottom - 1);
|
|
|
|
rc.right = rc.left + pmc->dxCol;
|
|
|
|
for (icol = 0; icol < CALCOLMAX; icol++)
|
|
{
|
|
psz = pmc->li.rgszDay[(icol + pmc->li.dowStartWeek) % 7];
|
|
|
|
DrawText(hdc, psz, lstrlen(psz), &rc, DT_CENTER | DT_NOPREFIX | DT_SINGLELINE | DT_VCENTER);
|
|
rc.left += pmc->dxCol;
|
|
rc.right += pmc->dxCol;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
// Check to see how many days from the previous month exist in this months calendar
|
|
nDay = pmc->rgnDayUL[iIndex]; // last day in prev month that won't be shown in this month
|
|
cdy = pmc->rgcDay[iIndex]; // # of days in prev month
|
|
|
|
// Calculate the number of weeks to display
|
|
if (fDrawNext)
|
|
crowShow = CALROWMAX;
|
|
else
|
|
crowShow = ((cdy - nDay) + pmc->rgcDay[iIndex + 1] + 6/* round up */) / 7;
|
|
|
|
if (nDay != cdy)
|
|
{
|
|
// start at previous month
|
|
iMonth--;
|
|
if(iMonth <= 0)
|
|
{
|
|
iMonth = 12;
|
|
iYear--;
|
|
}
|
|
nDay++;
|
|
|
|
fView = FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
// start at this month
|
|
iIndex++; // this month
|
|
|
|
nDay = 1;
|
|
cdy = pmc->rgcDay[iIndex];
|
|
|
|
fView = TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Draw the week numbers
|
|
//
|
|
if (MonthCal_ShowWeekNumbers(pmc))
|
|
{
|
|
// translate the relative coords to window coords
|
|
rc = pmc->rcWeekNum;
|
|
rc.left += prc->left;
|
|
rc.top += prc->top;
|
|
rc.right += prc->left;
|
|
rc.bottom = rc.top + (pmc->dyRow * crowShow);
|
|
|
|
// draw the week numbers
|
|
if (RectVisible(hdc, &rc))
|
|
{
|
|
MoveToEx(hdc, rc.right - 1, rc.top + 4, NULL);
|
|
LineTo(hdc, rc.right - 1, rc.bottom - 4);
|
|
|
|
st.wYear = (WORD) iYear;
|
|
st.wMonth = (WORD) iMonth;
|
|
st.wDay = (WORD) nDay;
|
|
nweek = GetWeekNumber(&st, pmc->li.dowStartWeek, pmc->li.firstWeek);
|
|
|
|
rc.bottom = rc.top + pmc->dyRow;
|
|
|
|
for (irow = 0; irow < crowShow; irow++)
|
|
{
|
|
wsprintf(rgch, g_szNumFmt, nweek);
|
|
DrawText(hdc, rgch, (nweek > 9 ? 2 : 1), &rc,
|
|
DT_CENTER | DT_NOCLIP | DT_NOPREFIX | DT_SINGLELINE | DT_VCENTER);
|
|
|
|
rc.top += pmc->dyRow;
|
|
rc.bottom += pmc->dyRow;
|
|
IncrSystemTime(&st, &st, 1, INCRSYS_WEEK);
|
|
nweek = GetWeekNumber(&st, pmc->li.dowStartWeek, pmc->li.firstWeek);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (!fView)
|
|
SetTextColor(hdc, clrGrayText);
|
|
else
|
|
SetTextColor(hdc, clrText);
|
|
|
|
rc = pmc->rcDayNum;
|
|
rc.left += prc->left;
|
|
rc.top += prc->top;
|
|
rc.right = rc.left + pmc->dxCol;
|
|
rc.bottom = rc.top + pmc->dyRow;
|
|
|
|
fReset = FALSE;
|
|
fBold = FALSE;
|
|
|
|
for (irow = 0; irow < crowShow; irow++)
|
|
{
|
|
rcT = rc;
|
|
|
|
for (icol = 0; icol < CALCOLMAX; icol++)
|
|
{
|
|
if ((fView || fDrawPrev) && RectVisible(hdc, &rcT))
|
|
{
|
|
wsprintf(rgch, g_szNumFmt, nDay);
|
|
|
|
if (MonthCal_IsDayState(pmc))
|
|
{
|
|
// if we're in a dropdown we don't display
|
|
if (MCIsBoldOffsetDay(pmc, nDay, iIndex))
|
|
{
|
|
if (!fBold)
|
|
{
|
|
SelectObject(hdc, (HGDIOBJ)pmc->hfontBold);
|
|
fBold = TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
if (fBold)
|
|
{
|
|
SelectObject(hdc, (HGDIOBJ)pmc->hfont);
|
|
fBold = FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (isel = MCIsSelectedDayMoYr(pmc, nDay, iMonth, iYear))
|
|
{
|
|
int x1, x2;
|
|
|
|
clrOld = SetTextColor(hdc, clrHiliteText);
|
|
hbrushOld = SelectObject(hdc, (HGDIOBJ)hbrSelect);
|
|
fReset = TRUE;
|
|
|
|
SelectObject(hdc, GetStockObject(NULL_PEN));
|
|
|
|
x1 = 0;
|
|
x2 = 0;
|
|
if (isel & SEL_DOT)
|
|
{
|
|
Ellipse(hdc, rcT.left + 2, rcT.top + 2, rcT.right - 1, rcT.bottom - 1);
|
|
if (isel == SEL_BEGIN)
|
|
{
|
|
x1 = rcT.left + (rcT.right - rcT.left) / 2;
|
|
x2 = rcT.right;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (isel == SEL_END)
|
|
{
|
|
x1 = rcT.left;
|
|
x2 = rcT.left + (rcT.right - rcT.left) / 2;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
x1 = rcT.left;
|
|
x2 = rcT.right;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (x1 && x2)
|
|
{
|
|
Rectangle(hdc, x1, rcT.top + 2, x2 + 1, rcT.bottom - 1);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
DrawText(hdc, rgch, (nDay > 9 ? 2 : 1), &rcT,
|
|
DT_CENTER | DT_NOCLIP | DT_NOPREFIX | DT_SINGLELINE | DT_VCENTER);
|
|
|
|
if (MonthCal_ShowTodayCircle(pmc) && pmc->fToday && iIndexSave == pmc->iMonthToday &&
|
|
icol == pmc->iColToday && irow == pmc->iRowToday)
|
|
{
|
|
MCDrawTodayCircle(pmc, hdc, &rcT);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (fReset)
|
|
{
|
|
SetTextColor(hdc, clrOld);
|
|
SelectObject(hdc, (HGDIOBJ)hbrushOld);
|
|
fReset = FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
rcT.left += pmc->dxCol;
|
|
rcT.right += pmc->dxCol;
|
|
|
|
nDay++;
|
|
if (nDay > cdy)
|
|
{
|
|
if (!fDrawNext && iIndex > iIndexSave)
|
|
goto doneMonth;
|
|
|
|
nDay = 1;
|
|
iIndex++;
|
|
cdy = pmc->rgcDay[iIndex];
|
|
iMonth++;
|
|
if (iMonth > 12)
|
|
{
|
|
iMonth = 1;
|
|
iYear++;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
fView = !fView;
|
|
SetTextColor(hdc, fView ? clrText : clrGrayText);
|
|
|
|
fDrawPrev = fDrawNext;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
rc.top += pmc->dyRow;
|
|
rc.bottom += pmc->dyRow;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
doneMonth:
|
|
|
|
SelectObject(hdc, hfontOrig);
|
|
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
int MCIsSelectedDayMoYr(MONTHCAL *pmc, int iDay, int iMonth, int iYear)
|
|
{
|
|
SYSTEMTIME st;
|
|
int iBegin, iEnd;
|
|
int iret = 0;
|
|
|
|
st.wYear = (WORD) iYear;
|
|
st.wMonth = (WORD) iMonth;
|
|
st.wDay = (WORD) iDay;
|
|
|
|
iBegin = CmpDate(&st, &pmc->st);
|
|
|
|
if (MonthCal_IsMultiSelect(pmc))
|
|
{
|
|
iEnd = CmpDate(&st, &pmc->stEndSel);
|
|
|
|
if (iBegin > 0 && iEnd< 0)
|
|
iret = SEL_MID;
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
if (iBegin == 0)
|
|
iret |= SEL_BEGIN;
|
|
|
|
if (iEnd == 0)
|
|
iret |= SEL_END;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else if (iBegin == 0)
|
|
{
|
|
iret = SEL_DOT;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return(iret);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
BOOL MCIsBoldOffsetDay(MONTHCAL *pmc, int nDay, int iIndex)
|
|
{
|
|
return(pmc->rgdayState && (pmc->rgdayState[iIndex] & (1L << (nDay - 1))) != 0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCNcDestroyHandler(HWND hwnd, MONTHCAL *pmc, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
|
|
{
|
|
if (pmc)
|
|
{
|
|
if (pmc->hpenToday)
|
|
DeleteObject((HGDIOBJ)pmc->hpenToday);
|
|
if (pmc->hfontBold)
|
|
DeleteObject((HGDIOBJ)pmc->hfontBold);
|
|
|
|
if (pmc->hmenuCtxt)
|
|
DestroyMenu(pmc->hmenuCtxt);
|
|
if (pmc->hmenuMonth)
|
|
DestroyMenu(pmc->hmenuMonth);
|
|
|
|
if (pmc->idTimer)
|
|
KillTimer(pmc->ci.hwnd, pmc->idTimer);
|
|
if (pmc->idTimerToday)
|
|
KillTimer(pmc->ci.hwnd, pmc->idTimerToday);
|
|
|
|
MCFreeCalendarInfo(&pmc->ct);
|
|
|
|
GlobalFreePtr(pmc);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// In case rogue messages float through after we have freed the pdtpick, set
|
|
// the handle in the window structure to FFFF and test for this value at
|
|
// the top of the WndProc
|
|
MonthCal_SetPtr(hwnd, NULL);
|
|
|
|
// Call DefWindowProc32 to free all little chunks of memory such as szName
|
|
// and rgwScroll.
|
|
DefWindowProc(hwnd, WM_NCDESTROY, wParam, lParam);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Computes the following:
|
|
* nViewCols
|
|
* nViewRows
|
|
* rcCentered
|
|
* rcPrev
|
|
* rcNext
|
|
*/
|
|
void MCRecomputeSizing(MONTHCAL *pmc, RECT *prect)
|
|
{
|
|
RECT rc;
|
|
int dx, dy, dCal;
|
|
|
|
// Space for entire calendar
|
|
pmc->rc = *prect;
|
|
|
|
dx = prect->right - prect->left;
|
|
dy = prect->bottom - prect->top;
|
|
|
|
pmc->nViewCols = 1 + (dx - pmc->dxMonth) / (pmc->dxMonth + CALBORDER);
|
|
pmc->nViewRows = 1 + (dy - pmc->dyMonth - pmc->dyToday) / (pmc->dyMonth + CALBORDER);
|
|
|
|
// if dx < dxMonth or dy < dyMonth, these can be zero. That's bad...
|
|
if (pmc->nViewCols < 1)
|
|
pmc->nViewCols = 1;
|
|
if (pmc->nViewRows < 1)
|
|
pmc->nViewRows = 1;
|
|
|
|
// Make sure we don't display more than CALMONTHMAX months
|
|
while ((pmc->nViewRows * pmc->nViewCols) > CALMONTHMAX)
|
|
{
|
|
if (pmc->nViewRows > pmc->nViewCols)
|
|
pmc->nViewRows--;
|
|
else
|
|
pmc->nViewCols--;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// RC for the months, centered within the client window
|
|
dCal = pmc->nViewCols * (pmc->dxMonth + CALBORDER) - CALBORDER;
|
|
pmc->rcCentered.left = (dx - dCal) / 2;
|
|
if (pmc->rcCentered.left < 0)
|
|
pmc->rcCentered.left = 0;
|
|
pmc->rcCentered.right = pmc->rcCentered.left + dCal;
|
|
|
|
dCal = pmc->nViewRows * (pmc->dyMonth + CALBORDER) - CALBORDER + pmc->dyToday;
|
|
pmc->rcCentered.top = (dy - dCal) / 2;
|
|
if (pmc->rcCentered.top < 0)
|
|
pmc->rcCentered.top = 0;
|
|
pmc->rcCentered.bottom = pmc->rcCentered.top + dCal;
|
|
|
|
// Calculate and set RCs for the spin buttons
|
|
rc.top = pmc->rcCentered.top + (pmc->dyRow * 2 - pmc->dyCalArrow) /2;
|
|
rc.bottom = rc.top + pmc->dyCalArrow;
|
|
|
|
rc.left = pmc->rcCentered.left + pmc->dxArrowMargin;
|
|
rc.right = rc.left + pmc->dxCalArrow;
|
|
pmc->rcPrev = rc;
|
|
|
|
rc.right = pmc->rcCentered.right - pmc->dxArrowMargin;
|
|
rc.left = rc.right - pmc->dxCalArrow;
|
|
pmc->rcNext = rc;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LRESULT MCSizeHandler(MONTHCAL *pmc, RECT *prc)
|
|
{
|
|
int nMax;
|
|
SYSTEMTIME st;
|
|
int cmo, dmo;
|
|
|
|
MCRecomputeSizing(pmc, prc);
|
|
|
|
nMax = pmc->nViewRows * pmc->nViewCols;
|
|
|
|
|
|
// Compute new start date
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->stMonthFirst, st);
|
|
|
|
// BUGBUG: this doesn't consider stEndSel
|
|
cmo = (pmc->stMonthLast.wYear - (int)pmc->st.wYear) * 12 +
|
|
(pmc->stMonthLast.wMonth - (int)pmc->st.wMonth);
|
|
dmo = nMax - pmc->nMonths;
|
|
|
|
if (-dmo > cmo)
|
|
{
|
|
// Selected mon/yr not in view
|
|
IncrSystemTime(&st, &st, -(cmo + dmo), INCRSYS_MONTH);
|
|
cmo = 0;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// If the # of months being displayed has changed, then lets try to
|
|
// start the calendar from January.
|
|
if ((dmo != 0) && (cmo + dmo >= pmc->stMonthFirst.wMonth - 1))
|
|
st.wMonth = 1;
|
|
|
|
MCUpdateStartEndDates(pmc, &st);
|
|
|
|
InvalidateRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
UpdateWindow(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
|
|
return(0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// For each month being displayed, compute the precise locations of all
|
|
// the gizmos we draw into the month header area.
|
|
//
|
|
void MCUpdateMonthNamePos(MONTHCAL *pmc)
|
|
{
|
|
HDC hdc;
|
|
int iCount;
|
|
SYSTEMTIME st;
|
|
TCHAR rgch[64];
|
|
SIZE size;
|
|
HGDIOBJ hfontOrig;
|
|
|
|
hdc = GetDC(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
hfontOrig = SelectObject(hdc, (HGDIOBJ)pmc->hfontBold);
|
|
|
|
st = pmc->stMonthFirst;
|
|
|
|
for (iCount = 0; iCount < pmc->nMonths; iCount++)
|
|
{
|
|
PMONTHMETRICS pmm = &pmc->rgmm[iCount];
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
MCGetMonthFormat(pmc, &st, rgch, ARRAYSIZE(rgch), pmm);
|
|
|
|
GetTextExtentPoint32(hdc, rgch, lstrlen(rgch), &size);
|
|
pmm->rgi[IMM_START] = (pmc->dxMonth - size.cx) / 2;
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Now convert the indices into pixels so we can figure out where
|
|
// all the strings ended up.
|
|
//
|
|
for (i = IMM_DATEFIRST; i <= IMM_DATELAST; i++) {
|
|
SIZE sizeT;
|
|
// In case of horrible error, pretend the marker was at the
|
|
// beginning of the string.
|
|
sizeT.cx = 0;
|
|
GetTextExtentPoint32(hdc, rgch, pmm->rgi[i], &sizeT);
|
|
pmm->rgi[i] = pmm->rgi[IMM_START] + sizeT.cx;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Now flip the coordinates for RTL.
|
|
//
|
|
if (pmc->fHeaderRTL || IS_WINDOW_RTL_MIRRORED(pmc->ci.hwnd))
|
|
{
|
|
int dxStart, dxEnd;
|
|
|
|
// Flip the month...
|
|
dxStart = pmm->rgi[IMM_MONTHSTART] - pmm->rgi[IMM_START];
|
|
dxEnd = pmm->rgi[IMM_MONTHEND ] - pmm->rgi[IMM_START];
|
|
pmm->rgi[IMM_MONTHSTART] = pmm->rgi[IMM_START] + size.cx - dxEnd;
|
|
pmm->rgi[IMM_MONTHEND ] = pmm->rgi[IMM_START] + size.cx - dxStart;
|
|
|
|
// Flip the year...
|
|
dxStart = pmm->rgi[IMM_YEARSTART] - pmm->rgi[IMM_START];
|
|
dxEnd = pmm->rgi[IMM_YEAREND ] - pmm->rgi[IMM_START];
|
|
pmm->rgi[IMM_YEARSTART] = pmm->rgi[IMM_START] + size.cx - dxEnd;
|
|
pmm->rgi[IMM_YEAREND ] = pmm->rgi[IMM_START] + size.cx - dxStart;
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// On to the next month
|
|
|
|
if(++st.wMonth > 12)
|
|
{
|
|
st.wMonth = 1;
|
|
st.wYear++;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
SelectObject(hdc, hfontOrig);
|
|
ReleaseDC(pmc->ci.hwnd, hdc);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
* Computes the following, given the number of rows & columns available:
|
|
* stMonthFirst.wMonth
|
|
* stMonthFirst.wYear
|
|
* stMonthLast.wMonth
|
|
* stMonthLast.wYear
|
|
* nMonths
|
|
*
|
|
* Trashes *pstStart
|
|
*/
|
|
void MCUpdateStartEndDates(MONTHCAL *pmc, SYSTEMTIME *pstStart)
|
|
{
|
|
int iCount, iMonth, iYear;
|
|
int nMonthsToEdge;
|
|
|
|
pmc->nMonths = pmc->nViewRows * pmc->nViewCols;
|
|
|
|
// make sure pstStart to pstStart+nMonths is within range
|
|
nMonthsToEdge = ((int)pmc->stMax.wYear - (int)pstStart->wYear) * 12 +
|
|
((int)pmc->stMax.wMonth - (int)pstStart->wMonth) + 1;
|
|
if (nMonthsToEdge < pmc->nMonths)
|
|
IncrSystemTime(pstStart, pstStart, nMonthsToEdge - pmc->nMonths, INCRSYS_MONTH);
|
|
|
|
if (CmpDate(pstStart, &pmc->stMin) < 0)
|
|
{
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->stMin, *pstStart);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nMonthsToEdge = ((int)pmc->stMax.wYear - (int)pstStart->wYear) * 12 +
|
|
((int)pmc->stMax.wMonth - (int)pstStart->wMonth) + 1;
|
|
if (nMonthsToEdge < pmc->nMonths)
|
|
pmc->nMonths = nMonthsToEdge;
|
|
|
|
pmc->stMonthFirst.wYear = pstStart->wYear;
|
|
pmc->stMonthFirst.wMonth = pstStart->wMonth;
|
|
pmc->stMonthFirst.wDay = 1;
|
|
if (CmpDate(&pmc->stMonthFirst, &pmc->stMin) < 0)
|
|
{
|
|
pmc->stMonthFirst.wDay = pmc->stMin.wDay;
|
|
ASSERT(0==CmpDate(&pmc->stMonthFirst, &pmc->stMin));
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// these ranges are CALMONTHMAX+2 and nMonths <= CALMONTHMAX, so we are safe
|
|
// index 0 corresponds to stViewFirst (DAYSTATE) info
|
|
// index 1..nMonths correspond to stMonthFirst..stMonthLast info
|
|
// index nMonths+1 corresponds to stViewLast (DAYSTATE) info
|
|
//
|
|
iYear = pmc->stMonthFirst.wYear;
|
|
iMonth = pmc->stMonthFirst.wMonth - 1;
|
|
if(iMonth == 0)
|
|
{
|
|
iMonth = 12;
|
|
iYear--;
|
|
}
|
|
for (iCount = 0; iCount <= pmc->nMonths+1; iCount++)
|
|
{
|
|
int cdy, dow, ddow;
|
|
|
|
// number of days in this month
|
|
cdy = GetDaysForMonth(iYear, iMonth);
|
|
pmc->rgcDay[iCount] = cdy;
|
|
|
|
// move to "this" month
|
|
if(++iMonth > 12)
|
|
{
|
|
iMonth = 1;
|
|
iYear++;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// last day of this month NOT visible when viewing NEXT month
|
|
dow = GetStartDowForMonth(iYear, iMonth);
|
|
ddow = dow - pmc->li.dowStartWeek;
|
|
if(ddow < 0)
|
|
ddow += CALCOLMAX;
|
|
pmc->rgnDayUL[iCount] = cdy - ddow;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// we want to always have days visible on the previous month
|
|
if (pmc->rgnDayUL[0] == pmc->rgcDay[0])
|
|
pmc->rgnDayUL[0] -= CALCOLMAX;
|
|
|
|
IncrSystemTime(&pmc->stMonthFirst, &pmc->stMonthLast, pmc->nMonths - 1, INCRSYS_MONTH);
|
|
pmc->stMonthLast.wDay = (WORD) pmc->rgcDay[pmc->nMonths];
|
|
if (pmc->fMaxYrSet && CmpDate(&pmc->stMonthLast, &pmc->stMax) > 0)
|
|
{
|
|
pmc->stMonthLast.wDay = pmc->stMax.wDay;
|
|
ASSERT(0==CmpDate(&pmc->stMonthLast, &pmc->stMax));
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
pmc->stViewFirst.wYear = pmc->stMonthFirst.wYear;
|
|
pmc->stViewFirst.wMonth = pmc->stMonthFirst.wMonth - 1;
|
|
if (pmc->stViewFirst.wMonth == 0)
|
|
{
|
|
pmc->stViewFirst.wMonth = 12;
|
|
pmc->stViewFirst.wYear--;
|
|
}
|
|
pmc->stViewFirst.wDay = pmc->rgnDayUL[0] + 1;
|
|
|
|
pmc->stViewLast.wYear = pmc->stMonthLast.wYear;
|
|
pmc->stViewLast.wMonth = pmc->stMonthLast.wMonth + 1;
|
|
if (pmc->stViewLast.wMonth == 13)
|
|
{
|
|
pmc->stViewLast.wMonth = 1;
|
|
pmc->stViewLast.wYear++;
|
|
}
|
|
// total days - (days in last month + remaining days in previous month)
|
|
pmc->stViewLast.wDay = CALROWMAX * CALCOLMAX -
|
|
(pmc->rgcDay[pmc->nMonths] +
|
|
pmc->rgcDay[pmc->nMonths-1] - pmc->rgnDayUL[pmc->nMonths-1]);
|
|
|
|
MCUpdateDayState(pmc);
|
|
MCUpdateRcDayCur(pmc, &pmc->st);
|
|
MCUpdateToday(pmc);
|
|
MCUpdateMonthNamePos(pmc);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCUpdateToday(MONTHCAL *pmc)
|
|
{
|
|
if (MonthCal_ShowTodayCircle(pmc))
|
|
{
|
|
int iMonth;
|
|
|
|
iMonth = MCGetOffsetForYrMo(pmc, pmc->stToday.wYear, pmc->stToday.wMonth);
|
|
if (iMonth < 0)
|
|
{
|
|
// today is not visible in the displayed months
|
|
pmc->fToday = FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
int iDay;
|
|
|
|
// today is visible in the displayed months
|
|
pmc->fToday = TRUE;
|
|
|
|
iDay = pmc->rgcDay[iMonth] - pmc->rgnDayUL[iMonth] + pmc->stToday.wDay - 1;
|
|
|
|
pmc->iMonthToday = iMonth;
|
|
pmc->iRowToday = iDay / CALCOLMAX;
|
|
pmc->iColToday = iDay % CALCOLMAX;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
BOOL FUpdateRcDayCur(MONTHCAL *pmc, POINT pt)
|
|
{
|
|
int iRow, iCol;
|
|
RECT rc;
|
|
SYSTEMTIME st;
|
|
|
|
if (!FGetDateForPt(pmc, pt, &st, NULL, &iCol, &iRow, &rc))
|
|
return FALSE;
|
|
|
|
if (CmpDate(&st, &pmc->stMin) < 0)
|
|
return FALSE;
|
|
|
|
if (CmpDate(&st, &pmc->stMax) > 0)
|
|
return FALSE;
|
|
|
|
// calculate the day rc
|
|
pmc->rcDayCur.left = rc.left + pmc->rcDayNum.left + iCol * pmc->dxCol;
|
|
pmc->rcDayCur.top = rc.top + pmc->rcDayNum.top + iRow * pmc->dyRow;
|
|
pmc->rcDayCur.right = pmc->rcDayCur.left + pmc->dxCol;
|
|
pmc->rcDayCur.bottom = pmc->rcDayCur.top + pmc->dyRow;
|
|
|
|
return(TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCUpdateDayState(MONTHCAL *pmc)
|
|
{
|
|
HWND hwndParent;
|
|
|
|
if (!MonthCal_IsDayState(pmc))
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
hwndParent = GetParent(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
if (hwndParent)
|
|
{
|
|
int i, mon, yr, cmonths;
|
|
|
|
yr = pmc->stViewFirst.wYear;
|
|
mon = pmc->stViewFirst.wMonth;
|
|
cmonths = pmc->nMonths + 2;
|
|
|
|
// don't do anything unless we need to
|
|
if (cmonths != pmc->cds || mon != pmc->dsMonth || yr != pmc->dsYear)
|
|
{
|
|
// this is a small enough to not deal with allocating it
|
|
NMDAYSTATE nmds;
|
|
MONTHDAYSTATE buffer[CALMONTHMAX+2];
|
|
|
|
ZeroMemory(&nmds, sizeof(nmds));
|
|
nmds.stStart.wYear = (WORD) yr;
|
|
nmds.stStart.wMonth = (WORD) mon;
|
|
nmds.stStart.wDay = 1;
|
|
nmds.cDayState = cmonths;
|
|
nmds.prgDayState = buffer;
|
|
|
|
CCSendNotify(&pmc->ci, MCN_GETDAYSTATE, &nmds.nmhdr);
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; i < cmonths; i++)
|
|
pmc->rgdayState[i] = nmds.prgDayState[i];
|
|
|
|
pmc->cds = cmonths;
|
|
pmc->dsMonth = mon;
|
|
pmc->dsYear = yr;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCNotifySelChange(MONTHCAL *pmc, UINT uMsg)
|
|
{
|
|
HWND hwndParent;
|
|
|
|
if (pmc->fNoNotify)
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
hwndParent = GetParent(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
if (hwndParent)
|
|
{
|
|
NMSELCHANGE nmsc;
|
|
ZeroMemory(&nmsc, sizeof(nmsc));
|
|
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->st, nmsc.stSelStart);
|
|
if (MonthCal_IsMultiSelect(pmc))
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->stEndSel, nmsc.stSelEnd);
|
|
|
|
CCSendNotify(&pmc->ci, uMsg, &nmsc.nmhdr);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCUpdateRcDayCur(MONTHCAL *pmc, SYSTEMTIME *pst)
|
|
{
|
|
int iOff;
|
|
|
|
iOff = MCGetOffsetForYrMo(pmc, pst->wYear, pst->wMonth);
|
|
if (iOff >= 0)
|
|
MCGetRcForDay(pmc, iOff, pst->wDay, &pmc->rcDayCur);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// returns zero-based index into DISPLAYED months for month
|
|
// if month is not in DISPLAYED months, then -1 is returned...
|
|
int MCGetOffsetForYrMo(MONTHCAL *pmc, int iYear, int iMonth)
|
|
{
|
|
int iOff;
|
|
|
|
iOff = ((int)iYear - pmc->stMonthFirst.wYear) * 12 + (int)iMonth - pmc->stMonthFirst.wMonth;
|
|
|
|
if (iOff < 0 || iOff >= pmc->nMonths)
|
|
return(-1);
|
|
|
|
return(iOff);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// iMonth is a zero-based index relative to the DISPLAYED months.
|
|
// iDay is a 1-based index of the day of the month,
|
|
void MCGetRcForDay(MONTHCAL *pmc, int iMonth, int iDay, RECT *prc)
|
|
{
|
|
RECT rc;
|
|
int iPlace, iRow, iCol;
|
|
|
|
MCGetRcForMonth(pmc, iMonth, &rc);
|
|
|
|
iPlace = pmc->rgcDay[iMonth] - pmc->rgnDayUL[iMonth] + iDay - 1;
|
|
iRow = iPlace / CALCOLMAX;
|
|
iCol = iPlace % CALCOLMAX;
|
|
|
|
prc->left = rc.left + pmc->rcDayNum.left + (pmc->dxCol * iCol);
|
|
prc->top = rc.top + pmc->rcDayNum.top + (pmc->dyRow * iRow);
|
|
prc->right = prc->left + pmc->dxCol;
|
|
prc->bottom = prc->top + pmc->dyRow;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// This routine gets the bounding rect for the iMonth of the displayed months.
|
|
// NOTE: iMonth is a zero-based index relative to the DISPLAYED months,
|
|
// counting along the rows.
|
|
//
|
|
void MCGetRcForMonth(MONTHCAL *pmc, int iMonth, RECT *prc)
|
|
{
|
|
int iRow, iCol, d;
|
|
|
|
iRow = iMonth / pmc->nViewCols;
|
|
iCol = iMonth % pmc->nViewCols;
|
|
|
|
// intialize the rect to be the bounding rect for the month in the
|
|
// top left corner
|
|
prc->left = pmc->rcCentered.left;
|
|
prc->right = prc->left + pmc->dxMonth;
|
|
prc->top = pmc->rcCentered.top;
|
|
prc->bottom = prc->top + pmc->dyMonth;
|
|
|
|
if (iCol) // slide the rect across to the correct column
|
|
{
|
|
d = (pmc->dxMonth + CALBORDER) * iCol;
|
|
prc->left += d;
|
|
prc->right += d;
|
|
}
|
|
if (iRow) // slide the rect down to the correct row
|
|
{
|
|
d = (pmc->dyMonth + CALBORDER) * iRow;
|
|
prc->top += d;
|
|
prc->bottom += d;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Changes starting month by nDelta
|
|
// returns number of months actually changed
|
|
int FIncrStartMonth(MONTHCAL *pmc, int nDelta, BOOL fNoCurDayChange)
|
|
{
|
|
SYSTEMTIME stStart;
|
|
|
|
int nOldStartYear = pmc->stMonthFirst.wYear;
|
|
int nOldStartMonth = pmc->stMonthFirst.wMonth;
|
|
|
|
IncrSystemTime(&pmc->stMonthFirst, &stStart, nDelta, INCRSYS_MONTH);
|
|
|
|
// MCUpdateStartEndDates takes stMin/stMax into account
|
|
MCUpdateStartEndDates(pmc, &stStart);
|
|
|
|
if (!fNoCurDayChange)
|
|
{
|
|
int cday;
|
|
|
|
// BUGBUG: we arbitrarily set the currently selected day
|
|
// to be in the new stMonthFirst, but given the way the
|
|
// control works, I doubt we ever hit this code. what's it for??
|
|
|
|
if (MonthCal_IsMultiSelect(pmc))
|
|
cday = DaysBetweenDates(&pmc->st, &pmc->stEndSel);
|
|
|
|
// need to set date for focus here
|
|
pmc->st.wMonth = pmc->stMonthFirst.wMonth;
|
|
pmc->st.wYear = pmc->stMonthFirst.wYear;
|
|
|
|
// Check to see if the day is in range, eg, Jan 31 -> Feb 28
|
|
if (pmc->st.wDay > pmc->rgcDay[1])
|
|
pmc->st.wDay = (WORD) pmc->rgcDay[1];
|
|
|
|
if (MonthCal_IsMultiSelect(pmc))
|
|
IncrSystemTime(&pmc->st, &pmc->stEndSel, cday, INCRSYS_DAY);
|
|
|
|
MCNotifySelChange(pmc, MCN_SELCHANGE);
|
|
|
|
MCUpdateRcDayCur(pmc, &pmc->st);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
MCInvalidateMonthDays(pmc);
|
|
|
|
return((pmc->stMonthFirst.wYear-nOldStartYear)*12 + (pmc->stMonthFirst.wMonth-nOldStartMonth));
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// FIncrStartMonth with a beep when it doesn't change.
|
|
int MCIncrStartMonth(MONTHCAL *pmc, int nDelta, BOOL fDelayDayChange)
|
|
{
|
|
int cmoSpun;
|
|
|
|
// FIncrStartMonth takes stMin/stMax into account
|
|
cmoSpun = FIncrStartMonth(pmc, nDelta, fDelayDayChange);
|
|
|
|
if (cmoSpun==0)
|
|
MessageBeep(0);
|
|
|
|
return(cmoSpun);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Determines in which month the given point lies. In other words, if the
|
|
// calendar control is currently sized to show six months, this routine
|
|
// determines in which which of those six months the point lies. It returns
|
|
// the zero based index of the month, counting along the rows.
|
|
//
|
|
BOOL FGetOffsetForPt(MONTHCAL *pmc, POINT pt, int *piOffset)
|
|
{
|
|
int iRow, iCol, i;
|
|
|
|
// check to see if point is within the centered months
|
|
if (!PtInRect(&pmc->rcCentered, pt))
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
|
|
// calculate the month row and column
|
|
// (we're really fudging a little here, since the point could
|
|
// actually be within the space between months...)
|
|
iCol = (pt.x - pmc->rcCentered.left) / (pmc->dxMonth + CALBORDER);
|
|
iRow = (pt.y - pmc->rcCentered.top) / (pmc->dyMonth + CALBORDER);
|
|
|
|
i = iRow * pmc->nViewCols + iCol;
|
|
if (i >= pmc->nMonths)
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
|
|
*piOffset = i;
|
|
|
|
return(TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// This routine returns the row and column of day containing the given point
|
|
//
|
|
BOOL FGetRowColForRelPt(MONTHCAL *pmc, POINT ptRel, int *piRow, int *piCol)
|
|
{
|
|
if (!PtInRect(&pmc->rcDayNum, ptRel))
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
|
|
ptRel.x -= pmc->rcDayNum.left;
|
|
ptRel.y -= pmc->rcDayNum.top;
|
|
|
|
*piCol = ptRel.x / pmc->dxCol;
|
|
*piRow = ptRel.y / pmc->dyRow;
|
|
|
|
return(TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// This routine returns the month and year of the iMonth in the displayed
|
|
// months. NOTE: iMonth is a zero-based index of the displayed months
|
|
//
|
|
void GetYrMoForOffset(MONTHCAL *pmc, int iMonth, int *piYear, int *piMonth)
|
|
{
|
|
SYSTEMTIME st;
|
|
|
|
st.wDay = 1;
|
|
st.wMonth = pmc->stMonthFirst.wMonth;
|
|
st.wYear = pmc->stMonthFirst.wYear;
|
|
|
|
IncrSystemTime(&st, &st, iMonth, INCRSYS_MONTH);
|
|
|
|
*piYear = st.wYear;
|
|
*piMonth = st.wMonth;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// This routine returns, the day, month, and year of day containing the
|
|
// given point. It will optionally return the day of the month, the row and
|
|
// column in the month, and the bounding rect of the month containing the point.
|
|
// NOTE: the day returned in piDay can be less than 1 (to indicate a day in the
|
|
// previous month) or greater than the number of days in the month (to indicate
|
|
// a day in the next month).
|
|
//
|
|
BOOL FGetDateForPt(MONTHCAL *pmc, POINT pt, SYSTEMTIME *pst, int *piDay,
|
|
int* piCol, int* piRow, LPRECT prcMonth)
|
|
{
|
|
int iOff, iRow, iCol, iDay, iMon, iYear;
|
|
RECT rcMonth;
|
|
|
|
if (!FGetOffsetForPt(pmc, pt, &iOff))
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
|
|
MCGetRcForMonth(pmc, iOff, &rcMonth);
|
|
pt.x -= rcMonth.left;
|
|
pt.y -= rcMonth.top;
|
|
if (!FGetRowColForRelPt(pmc, pt, &iRow, &iCol))
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
|
|
// get the day containing the point by subtracting the number of days
|
|
// that are visible from the previous month, and then add one, since
|
|
// we are zero-based and the days of the month are 1-based.
|
|
//
|
|
iDay = iRow * CALCOLMAX + iCol - (pmc->rgcDay[iOff] - pmc->rgnDayUL[iOff]) + 1;
|
|
if (piDay)
|
|
*piDay = iDay;
|
|
|
|
if (iDay <= 0)
|
|
{
|
|
if (iOff)
|
|
return(FALSE); // dont accept days in prev month unless
|
|
// this happens to be the first month
|
|
|
|
iDay += pmc->rgcDay[iOff]; // add the cnt of days in the prev month,
|
|
--iOff; // then incr the month to get day in new month
|
|
}
|
|
else if (iDay > pmc->rgcDay[iOff+1])
|
|
{
|
|
if (iOff < (pmc->nMonths - 1)) // dont accept days in next month unless
|
|
return(FALSE); // this happens to be the last month
|
|
|
|
++iOff; // increment the month, and then sub the
|
|
iDay -= pmc->rgcDay[iOff]; // count of days to get day in new month
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
GetYrMoForOffset(pmc, iOff, &iYear, &iMon);
|
|
pst->wDay = (WORD) iDay;
|
|
pst->wMonth = (WORD) iMon;
|
|
pst->wYear = (WORD) iYear;
|
|
|
|
if (piCol)
|
|
*piCol = iCol;
|
|
|
|
if (piRow)
|
|
*piRow = iRow;
|
|
|
|
if (prcMonth)
|
|
*prcMonth = rcMonth;
|
|
|
|
return(TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
BOOL MCSetDate(MONTHCAL *pmc, SYSTEMTIME *pst)
|
|
{
|
|
int nDelta = 0;
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Can't set date outside of min/max range
|
|
//
|
|
if (CmpDate(pst, &pmc->stMin) < 0)
|
|
return FALSE;
|
|
if (CmpDate(pst, &pmc->stMax) > 0)
|
|
return FALSE;
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Set new day
|
|
//
|
|
pmc->st = *pst;
|
|
if (MonthCal_IsMultiSelect(pmc))
|
|
pmc->stEndSel = *pst;
|
|
|
|
FScrollIntoView(pmc);
|
|
|
|
MCNotifySelChange(pmc, MCN_SELCHANGE);
|
|
|
|
MCUpdateRcDayCur(pmc, pst);
|
|
|
|
return(TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCSetToday(MONTHCAL* pmc, SYSTEMTIME* pst)
|
|
{
|
|
SYSTEMTIME st;
|
|
RECT rc;
|
|
|
|
if (!pst)
|
|
{
|
|
GetLocalTime(&st);
|
|
pmc->fTodaySet = FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
st = *pst;
|
|
pmc->fTodaySet = TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (CmpDate(&st, &pmc->stToday) != 0)
|
|
{
|
|
MCGetRcForDay(pmc, pmc->iMonthToday, pmc->stToday.wDay, &rc);
|
|
InvalidateRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, &rc, FALSE);
|
|
|
|
pmc->stToday = st;
|
|
|
|
MCUpdateToday(pmc);
|
|
|
|
MCGetRcForDay(pmc, pmc->iMonthToday, pmc->stToday.wDay, &rc);
|
|
InvalidateRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, &rc, FALSE);
|
|
|
|
if (MonthCal_ShowToday(pmc))
|
|
{
|
|
MCGetTodayBtnRect(pmc, &rc);
|
|
InvalidateRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, &rc, FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
UpdateWindow(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LRESULT MCHandleTimer(MONTHCAL *pmc, WPARAM wParam)
|
|
{
|
|
if (wParam == CAL_IDAUTOSPIN)
|
|
{
|
|
int nDelta = pmc->fMonthDelta ? pmc->nMonthDelta : pmc->nMonths;
|
|
|
|
// BUGBUG pass last parameter TRUE if multiselect! else you
|
|
// can't multiselect across months
|
|
MCIncrStartMonth(pmc, (pmc->fSpinPrev ? -nDelta : nDelta), FALSE);
|
|
|
|
if (pmc->idTimer == 0)
|
|
pmc->idTimer = SetTimer(pmc->ci.hwnd, CAL_IDAUTOSPIN, CAL_MSECAUTOSPIN, NULL);
|
|
|
|
pmc->rcDayOld = pmc->rcDayCur;
|
|
UpdateWindow(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (wParam == CAL_TODAYTIMER)
|
|
{
|
|
if (!pmc->fTodaySet)
|
|
MCSetToday(pmc, NULL);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
MCNotifySelChange(pmc, MCN_SELCHANGE); // our date has changed
|
|
|
|
return((LRESULT)TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCInvalidateDates(MONTHCAL *pmc, SYSTEMTIME *pst1, SYSTEMTIME *pst2)
|
|
{
|
|
int iMonth, ioff, icol, irow;
|
|
RECT rc, rcMonth;
|
|
SYSTEMTIME st, stEnd;
|
|
|
|
if (CmpDate(pst1, &pmc->stViewLast) > 0 ||
|
|
CmpDate(pst2, &pmc->stViewFirst) < 0)
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
if (CmpDate(pst1, &pmc->stViewFirst) < 0)
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->stViewFirst, st);
|
|
else
|
|
CopyDate(*pst1, st);
|
|
|
|
if (CmpDate(pst2, &pmc->stViewLast) > 0)
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->stViewLast, stEnd);
|
|
else
|
|
CopyDate(*pst2, stEnd);
|
|
|
|
iMonth = MCGetOffsetForYrMo(pmc, st.wYear, st.wMonth);
|
|
if (iMonth == -1)
|
|
{
|
|
if (st.wMonth == pmc->stViewFirst.wMonth)
|
|
{
|
|
iMonth = 0;
|
|
ioff = st.wDay - pmc->rgnDayUL[0] - 1;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
iMonth = pmc->nMonths - 1;
|
|
ioff = st.wDay + pmc->rgcDay[pmc->nMonths] +
|
|
pmc->rgcDay[iMonth] - pmc->rgnDayUL[iMonth] - 1;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
ioff = st.wDay + (pmc->rgcDay[iMonth] - pmc->rgnDayUL[iMonth]) - 1;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
MCGetRcForMonth(pmc, iMonth, &rcMonth);
|
|
|
|
// TODO: make it more efficient...
|
|
while (CmpDate(&st, &stEnd) <= 0)
|
|
{
|
|
irow = ioff / CALCOLMAX;
|
|
icol = ioff % CALCOLMAX;
|
|
rc.left = rcMonth.left + pmc->rcDayNum.left + (pmc->dxCol * icol);
|
|
rc.top = rcMonth.top + pmc->rcDayNum.top + (pmc->dyRow * irow);
|
|
rc.right = rc.left + pmc->dxCol;
|
|
rc.bottom = rc.top + pmc->dyRow;
|
|
|
|
InvalidateRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, &rc, FALSE);
|
|
|
|
IncrSystemTime(&st, &st, 1, INCRSYS_DAY);
|
|
ioff++;
|
|
|
|
if (st.wDay == 1)
|
|
{
|
|
if (st.wMonth != pmc->stMonthFirst.wMonth &&
|
|
st.wMonth != pmc->stViewLast.wMonth)
|
|
{
|
|
iMonth++;
|
|
MCGetRcForMonth(pmc, iMonth, &rcMonth);
|
|
|
|
ioff = ioff % CALCOLMAX;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCHandleMultiSelect(MONTHCAL *pmc, SYSTEMTIME *pst)
|
|
{
|
|
int i;
|
|
DWORD cday;
|
|
SYSTEMTIME stStart, stEnd;
|
|
|
|
if (!pmc->fMultiSelecting)
|
|
{
|
|
CopyDate(*pst, stStart);
|
|
CopyDate(*pst, stEnd);
|
|
|
|
pmc->fMultiSelecting = TRUE;
|
|
pmc->fForwardSelect = TRUE;
|
|
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->st, pmc->stStartPrev);
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->stEndSel, pmc->stEndPrev);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
if (pmc->fForwardSelect)
|
|
{
|
|
i = CmpDate(pst, &pmc->st);
|
|
if (i >= 0)
|
|
{
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->st, stStart);
|
|
CopyDate(*pst, stEnd);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
CopyDate(*pst, stStart);
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->st, stEnd);
|
|
pmc->fForwardSelect = FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
i = CmpDate(pst, &pmc->stEndSel);
|
|
if (i < 0)
|
|
{
|
|
CopyDate(*pst, stStart);
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->stEndSel, stEnd);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->stEndSel, stStart);
|
|
CopyDate(*pst, stEnd);
|
|
pmc->fForwardSelect = TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// check to make sure not exceeding cSelMax
|
|
cday = DaysBetweenDates(&stStart, &stEnd) + 1;
|
|
if (cday > pmc->cSelMax)
|
|
{
|
|
if (pmc->fForwardSelect)
|
|
IncrSystemTime(&stStart, &stEnd, pmc->cSelMax - 1, INCRSYS_DAY);
|
|
else
|
|
IncrSystemTime(&stEnd, &stStart, 1 - pmc->cSelMax, INCRSYS_DAY);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (0 == CmpDate(&stStart, &pmc->st) &&
|
|
0 == CmpDate(&stEnd, &pmc->stEndSel))
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
// TODO: do this more effeciently..
|
|
MCInvalidateDates(pmc, &pmc->st, &pmc->stEndSel);
|
|
MCInvalidateDates(pmc, &stStart, &stEnd);
|
|
|
|
CopyDate(stStart, pmc->st);
|
|
CopyDate(stEnd, pmc->stEndSel);
|
|
|
|
MCNotifySelChange(pmc, MCN_SELCHANGE);
|
|
|
|
UpdateWindow(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCGotoToday(MONTHCAL *pmc)
|
|
{
|
|
pmc->rcDayOld = pmc->rcDayCur;
|
|
|
|
// force old selection to get repainted
|
|
if (MonthCal_IsMultiSelect(pmc))
|
|
MCInvalidateDates(pmc, &pmc->st, &pmc->stEndSel);
|
|
else
|
|
InvalidateRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, &pmc->rcDayOld, FALSE);
|
|
|
|
MCSetDate(pmc, &pmc->stToday);
|
|
|
|
MCNotifySelChange(pmc, MCN_SELECT);
|
|
|
|
// force new selection to get repainted
|
|
InvalidateRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, &pmc->rcDayCur, FALSE);
|
|
UpdateWindow(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LRESULT MCContextMenu(MONTHCAL *pmc, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
|
|
{
|
|
POINT pt;
|
|
int click;
|
|
|
|
if (!pmc->fEnabled || !MonthCal_ShowToday(pmc))
|
|
return(0);
|
|
|
|
// ignore double click since this makes us advance twice
|
|
// since we already had a leftdown before the leftdblclk
|
|
if (!pmc->fCapture)
|
|
{
|
|
pt.x = GET_X_LPARAM(lParam);
|
|
pt.y = GET_Y_LPARAM(lParam);
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// If the context menu was generated from the keyboard,
|
|
// then put it at the focus rectangle.
|
|
//
|
|
if (pt.x == -1 && pt.y == -1)
|
|
{
|
|
pt.x = (pmc->rcDayCur.left + pmc->rcDayCur.right ) / 2;
|
|
pt.y = (pmc->rcDayCur.top + pmc->rcDayCur.bottom) / 2;
|
|
ClientToScreen(pmc->ci.hwnd, &pt);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
click = TrackPopupMenu(pmc->hmenuCtxt,
|
|
TPM_LEFTBUTTON | TPM_RIGHTBUTTON | TPM_RETURNCMD | TPM_NONOTIFY,
|
|
pt.x, pt.y, 0, pmc->ci.hwnd, NULL);
|
|
if (click >= 1)
|
|
MCGotoToday(pmc);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return(0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Computes the bounding rects for the month and the year in the title area of
|
|
// the month.
|
|
//
|
|
void MCGetTitleRcsForOffset(MONTHCAL* pmc, int iOffset, LPRECT prcMonth, LPRECT prcYear)
|
|
{
|
|
RECT rcT;
|
|
RECT rc;
|
|
MCGetRcForMonth(pmc, iOffset, &rc);
|
|
|
|
rcT.top = rc.top + (pmc->dyRow / 2);
|
|
rcT.bottom = rcT.top + pmc->dyRow;
|
|
|
|
rcT.left = rc.left + pmc->rcMonthName.left + pmc->rgmm[iOffset].rgi[IMM_MONTHSTART];
|
|
rcT.right = rc.left + pmc->rcMonthName.left + pmc->rgmm[iOffset].rgi[IMM_MONTHEND];
|
|
*prcMonth = rcT;
|
|
|
|
rcT.left = rc.left + pmc->rcMonthName.left + pmc->rgmm[iOffset].rgi[IMM_YEARSTART];
|
|
rcT.right = rc.left + pmc->rcMonthName.left + pmc->rgmm[iOffset].rgi[IMM_YEAREND];
|
|
*prcYear = rcT;
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LRESULT MCLButtonDown(MONTHCAL *pmc, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
|
|
{
|
|
HDC hdc;
|
|
POINT pt;
|
|
SYSTEMTIME st;
|
|
RECT rc, rcCal;
|
|
BOOL fShow;
|
|
MSG msg;
|
|
int offset, imonth, iyear;
|
|
|
|
if (!pmc->fEnabled)
|
|
return(0);
|
|
|
|
pt.x = GET_X_LPARAM(lParam);
|
|
pt.y = GET_Y_LPARAM(lParam);
|
|
|
|
// treat a shift click like an LMouseDown at the prev location and
|
|
// a MouseMove to the new location
|
|
if (MonthCal_IsMultiSelect(pmc) && ((wParam & MK_SHIFT) == MK_SHIFT) && (!PtInRect(&pmc->rcDayCur, pt)))
|
|
{
|
|
SetCapture(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
pmc->fCapture = TRUE;
|
|
|
|
pmc->fForwardSelect = (CmpDate(&pmc->stAnchor, &pmc->st) != 0) ? FALSE : TRUE;
|
|
pmc->fMultiSelecting = TRUE;
|
|
|
|
hdc = GetDC(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
DrawFocusRect(hdc, &pmc->rcDayCur); // draw focus rect
|
|
pmc->fFocusDrawn = TRUE;
|
|
ReleaseDC(pmc->ci.hwnd, hdc);
|
|
|
|
MCMouseMove(pmc, wParam, lParam); // draw the highlight to new date
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// ignore double click since this makes us advance twice
|
|
// since we already had a leftdown before the leftdblclk
|
|
if (!pmc->fCapture)
|
|
{
|
|
SetCapture(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
pmc->fCapture = TRUE;
|
|
|
|
// check for spin buttons
|
|
if ((pmc->fSpinPrev = (WORD) PtInRect(&pmc->rcPrev, pt)) || PtInRect(&pmc->rcNext, pt))
|
|
{
|
|
MCHandleTimer(pmc, CAL_IDAUTOSPIN);
|
|
|
|
return(0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// check for valid day
|
|
pmc->rcDayOld = pmc->rcDayCur; // rcDayCur should always be valid now
|
|
|
|
if (MonthCal_IsMultiSelect(pmc))
|
|
{
|
|
// need to cache these values because these are how
|
|
// we determine if the selection has changed and we
|
|
// need to notify the parent
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->st, pmc->stStartPrev);
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->stEndSel, pmc->stEndPrev);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (FUpdateRcDayCur(pmc, pt))
|
|
{
|
|
if (MonthCal_IsMultiSelect(pmc))
|
|
{
|
|
if (FGetDateForPt(pmc, pt, &st, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL))
|
|
MCHandleMultiSelect(pmc, &st);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
hdc = GetDC(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
DrawFocusRect(hdc, &pmc->rcDayCur); // draw focus rect
|
|
pmc->fFocusDrawn = TRUE;
|
|
ReleaseDC(pmc->ci.hwnd, hdc);
|
|
|
|
CopyDate(st, pmc->stAnchor); // new Anchor point
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
RECT rcMonth, rcYear;
|
|
int delta, year, month;
|
|
|
|
// is this a click in the today area...
|
|
if (MonthCal_ShowToday(pmc))
|
|
{
|
|
MCGetTodayBtnRect(pmc, &rc);
|
|
if (PtInRect(&rc, pt))
|
|
{
|
|
CCReleaseCapture(&pmc->ci);
|
|
pmc->fCapture = FALSE;
|
|
|
|
MCGotoToday(pmc);
|
|
return(0);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// figure out if the click was in a month name or a year
|
|
|
|
if (!FGetOffsetForPt(pmc, pt, &offset))
|
|
return(0);
|
|
|
|
GetYrMoForOffset(pmc, offset, &year, &month);
|
|
|
|
// calculate where the month name and year are,
|
|
// so we can figure out if they clicked in them...
|
|
MCGetTitleRcsForOffset(pmc, offset, &rcMonth, &rcYear);
|
|
|
|
delta = 0;
|
|
if (PtInRect(&rcMonth, pt))
|
|
{
|
|
CCReleaseCapture(&pmc->ci);
|
|
pmc->fCapture = FALSE;
|
|
|
|
ClientToScreen(pmc->ci.hwnd, &pt);
|
|
imonth = TrackPopupMenu(pmc->hmenuMonth,
|
|
TPM_LEFTALIGN | TPM_TOPALIGN |
|
|
TPM_NONOTIFY | TPM_RETURNCMD | TPM_LEFTBUTTON | TPM_RIGHTBUTTON,
|
|
pt.x, pt.y, 0, pmc->ci.hwnd, NULL);
|
|
if (imonth >= 1)
|
|
delta = imonth - month;
|
|
goto ChangeMonth;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (PtInRect(&rcYear, pt))
|
|
{
|
|
HWND hwndEdit, hwndUD, hwndFocus;
|
|
int yrMin, yrMax;
|
|
DWORD dwExStyle = 0L;
|
|
CCReleaseCapture(&pmc->ci);
|
|
pmc->fCapture = FALSE;
|
|
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// If the year is in a RTL string, then numeric control
|
|
// is to the left.
|
|
//
|
|
if (pmc->fHeaderRTL)
|
|
{
|
|
rcYear.left = (rcYear.right - (pmc->dxYearMax + 6));
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
rcYear.right = rcYear.left + pmc->dxYearMax + 6;
|
|
}
|
|
rcYear.top--;
|
|
rcYear.bottom++;
|
|
if(((pmc->fHeaderRTL) && !(IS_WINDOW_RTL_MIRRORED(pmc->ci.hwnd))) ||
|
|
(!(pmc->fHeaderRTL) && (IS_WINDOW_RTL_MIRRORED(pmc->ci.hwnd))))
|
|
{
|
|
// not mirrored force RTL, mirrored force LTR (for mirroring RTLis LTR!!)
|
|
dwExStyle|= WS_EX_RTLREADING;
|
|
}
|
|
hwndEdit = CreateWindowEx(dwExStyle, TEXT("EDIT"), NULL,
|
|
WS_CHILD | WS_VISIBLE | WS_BORDER | ES_READONLY | ES_LEFT | ES_AUTOHSCROLL,
|
|
rcYear.left, rcYear.top, rcYear.right - rcYear.left, rcYear.bottom - rcYear.top,
|
|
pmc->ci.hwnd, (HMENU)0, pmc->hinstance, NULL);
|
|
if (hwndEdit == NULL)
|
|
return(0);
|
|
|
|
pmc->hwndEdit = hwndEdit;
|
|
|
|
SendMessage(hwndEdit, WM_SETFONT, (WPARAM)pmc->hfontBold, (LPARAM)FALSE);
|
|
SendMessage(hwndEdit, EM_SETMARGINS, EC_LEFTMARGIN | EC_RIGHTMARGIN,
|
|
(LPARAM)MAKELONG(1, 1));
|
|
MCUpdateEditYear(pmc);
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Convert from Gregorian to display years.
|
|
//
|
|
year = GregorianToOther(&pmc->ct, year);
|
|
yrMin = GregorianToOther(&pmc->ct, pmc->stMin.wYear);
|
|
yrMax = 9999;
|
|
if (pmc->fMaxYrSet)
|
|
yrMax = GregorianToOther(&pmc->ct, pmc->stMax.wYear);
|
|
|
|
hwndUD = CreateUpDownControl(
|
|
WS_CHILD | WS_VISIBLE | WS_BORDER |
|
|
UDS_NOTHOUSANDS | UDS_ARROWKEYS,// | UDS_SETBUDDYINT,
|
|
pmc->fHeaderRTL ? (rcYear.left - 1 - (rcYear.bottom-rcYear.top)): (rcYear.right + 1),
|
|
rcYear.top,
|
|
rcYear.bottom - rcYear.top, rcYear.bottom - rcYear.top, pmc->ci.hwnd,
|
|
1, pmc->hinstance, hwndEdit, yrMax, yrMin, year);
|
|
if (hwndUD == NULL)
|
|
{
|
|
DestroyWindow(hwndEdit);
|
|
return(0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
pmc->hwndUD = hwndUD;
|
|
|
|
hwndFocus = SetFocus(hwndEdit);
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Widen the area depending on the string direction.
|
|
//
|
|
if (pmc->fHeaderRTL)
|
|
rcYear.left -= (1 + rcYear.bottom - rcYear.top);
|
|
else
|
|
rcYear.right += 1 + rcYear.bottom - rcYear.top;
|
|
// Use MapWindowRect, It works in a mirrored and unmirrored windows.
|
|
MapWindowRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, NULL, (LPPOINT)&rcYear);
|
|
|
|
rcCal = pmc->rc;
|
|
MapWindowRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, NULL, (LPPOINT)&rcCal);
|
|
|
|
fShow = TRUE;
|
|
|
|
while (fShow && GetFocus() == hwndEdit)
|
|
{
|
|
if (PeekMessage(&msg, NULL, 0, 0, PM_NOREMOVE))
|
|
{
|
|
// Check for events that cause the calendar to go away
|
|
|
|
if (msg.message == WM_KILLFOCUS ||
|
|
(msg.message >= WM_SYSKEYDOWN &&
|
|
msg.message <= WM_SYSDEADCHAR))
|
|
{
|
|
fShow = FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
else if ((msg.message == WM_LBUTTONDOWN ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_NCLBUTTONDOWN ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_RBUTTONDOWN ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_NCRBUTTONDOWN ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_MBUTTONDOWN ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_NCMBUTTONDOWN) &&
|
|
!PtInRect(&rcYear, msg.pt))
|
|
{
|
|
fShow = FALSE;
|
|
|
|
// if its a button down inside the calendar, eat it
|
|
// so the calendar doesn't do anything strange when
|
|
// the user is just trying to get rid of the year edit
|
|
if (PtInRect(&rcCal, msg.pt))
|
|
GetMessage(&msg, NULL, 0, 0);
|
|
|
|
break; // do not dispatch
|
|
}
|
|
else if (msg.message == WM_QUIT)
|
|
{ // Don't dispatch a WM_QUIT; leave it in the queue
|
|
break; // do not dispatch
|
|
}
|
|
else if (msg.message == WM_CHAR)
|
|
{
|
|
if (msg.wParam == VK_ESCAPE)
|
|
{
|
|
goto NoYearChange;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (msg.wParam == VK_RETURN)
|
|
{
|
|
fShow = FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
GetMessage(&msg, NULL, 0, 0);
|
|
TranslateMessage(&msg);
|
|
DispatchMessage(&msg);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
WaitMessage();
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
iyear = (int) SendMessage(hwndUD, UDM_GETPOS, 0, 0);
|
|
if (HIWORD(iyear) == 0)
|
|
delta = (iyear - year) * 12;
|
|
|
|
NoYearChange:
|
|
DestroyWindow(hwndUD);
|
|
DestroyWindow(hwndEdit);
|
|
|
|
pmc->hwndUD = NULL;
|
|
pmc->hwndEdit = NULL;
|
|
|
|
UpdateWindow(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
|
|
if (hwndFocus != NULL)
|
|
SetFocus(hwndFocus);
|
|
}
|
|
ChangeMonth:
|
|
if (delta != 0)
|
|
{
|
|
MCIncrStartMonth(pmc, delta, FALSE);
|
|
MCNotifySelChange(pmc,MCN_SELCHANGE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return(0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LRESULT MCLButtonUp(MONTHCAL *pmc, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
|
|
{
|
|
HDC hdc;
|
|
SYSTEMTIME st;
|
|
POINT pt;
|
|
|
|
if (pmc->fCapture)
|
|
{
|
|
CCReleaseCapture(&pmc->ci);
|
|
pmc->fCapture = FALSE;
|
|
|
|
if (pmc->idTimer)
|
|
{
|
|
KillTimer(pmc->ci.hwnd, pmc->idTimer);
|
|
pmc->idTimer = 0;
|
|
|
|
hdc = GetDC(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
MCPaintArrowBtn(pmc, hdc, pmc->fSpinPrev, FALSE);
|
|
ReleaseDC(pmc->ci.hwnd, hdc);
|
|
|
|
return(0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
if (pmc->fFocusDrawn)
|
|
{
|
|
hdc = GetDC(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
DrawFocusRect(hdc, &pmc->rcDayCur); // erase old focus rect
|
|
pmc->fFocusDrawn = FALSE;
|
|
ReleaseDC(pmc->ci.hwnd, hdc);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
pt.x = GET_X_LPARAM(lParam);
|
|
pt.y = GET_Y_LPARAM(lParam);
|
|
|
|
if (MonthCal_IsMultiSelect(pmc))
|
|
{
|
|
FUpdateRcDayCur(pmc, pt);
|
|
|
|
if (!EqualRect(&pmc->rcDayOld, &pmc->rcDayCur))
|
|
{
|
|
if (FGetDateForPt(pmc, pt, &st, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL))
|
|
MCHandleMultiSelect(pmc, &st);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
pmc->fMultiSelecting = FALSE;
|
|
if (0 != CmpDate(&pmc->stStartPrev, &pmc->st) ||
|
|
0 != CmpDate(&pmc->stEndPrev, &pmc->stEndSel))
|
|
{
|
|
FScrollIntoView(pmc);
|
|
}
|
|
MCNotifySelChange(pmc, MCN_SELECT);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
if (FUpdateRcDayCur(pmc, pt))
|
|
{
|
|
if (!EqualRect(&pmc->rcDayOld, &pmc->rcDayCur) && (FGetDateForPt(pmc, pt, &st, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL)))
|
|
{
|
|
InvalidateRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, &pmc->rcDayOld, FALSE);
|
|
InvalidateRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, &pmc->rcDayCur, FALSE);
|
|
|
|
MCSetDate(pmc, &st);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
MCNotifySelChange(pmc, MCN_SELECT);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return(0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LRESULT MCMouseMove(MONTHCAL *pmc, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
|
|
{
|
|
BOOL fPrev;
|
|
HDC hdc;
|
|
POINT pt;
|
|
SYSTEMTIME st;
|
|
|
|
if (pmc->fCapture)
|
|
{
|
|
pt.x = GET_X_LPARAM(lParam);
|
|
pt.y = GET_Y_LPARAM(lParam);
|
|
|
|
// check spin buttons
|
|
if ((fPrev = PtInRect(&pmc->rcPrev, pt)) || PtInRect(&pmc->rcNext, pt))
|
|
{
|
|
if (pmc->idTimer == 0)
|
|
{
|
|
pmc->fSpinPrev = (WORD) fPrev;
|
|
MCHandleTimer(pmc, CAL_IDAUTOSPIN);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return(0);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
hdc = GetDC(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
|
|
if (pmc->idTimer)
|
|
{
|
|
KillTimer(pmc->ci.hwnd, pmc->idTimer);
|
|
pmc->idTimer = 0;
|
|
MCPaintArrowBtn(pmc, hdc, pmc->fSpinPrev, FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// check days
|
|
if (!PtInRect(&pmc->rcDayCur, pt))
|
|
{
|
|
if (pmc->fFocusDrawn)
|
|
DrawFocusRect(hdc, &pmc->rcDayCur); // erase focus rect
|
|
|
|
if (pmc->fFocusDrawn = (WORD) FUpdateRcDayCur(pmc, pt))
|
|
{
|
|
// moved into a new valid day
|
|
if (pmc->fMultiSelecting)
|
|
{
|
|
if (FGetDateForPt(pmc, pt, &st, NULL, NULL, NULL, NULL))
|
|
MCHandleMultiSelect(pmc, &st);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
DrawFocusRect(hdc, &pmc->rcDayCur);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
// moved into an invalid position
|
|
pmc->rcDayCur = pmc->rcDayOld;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else if (!pmc->fFocusDrawn)
|
|
{
|
|
// handle case where we just moved back into rcDayCur from invalid area
|
|
DrawFocusRect(hdc, &pmc->rcDayCur);
|
|
pmc->fFocusDrawn = TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
ReleaseDC(pmc->ci.hwnd, hdc);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return(0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
LRESULT MCHandleKeydown(MONTHCAL *pmc, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
|
|
{
|
|
LONG lIncrement;
|
|
int iDirection;
|
|
SYSTEMTIME st;
|
|
BOOL fRet = FALSE;
|
|
HDC hdc = NULL;
|
|
RECT rcCurFocus;
|
|
|
|
// BUGBUG raymondc ERA - need to invalidate month title when selection
|
|
// moves in/out/within
|
|
|
|
switch (wParam)
|
|
{
|
|
case VK_CONTROL:
|
|
pmc->fControl = TRUE; // we'll clear this on WM_KEYUP
|
|
return TRUE;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case VK_SHIFT:
|
|
pmc->fShift = TRUE; // we'll clear this on WM_KEYUP
|
|
return TRUE;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case VK_LEFT: // goto previous day
|
|
iDirection = -1;
|
|
lIncrement = INCRSYS_DAY;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case VK_RIGHT: // goto next day
|
|
iDirection = 1;
|
|
lIncrement = INCRSYS_DAY;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case VK_UP: // goto previous week
|
|
iDirection = -1;
|
|
lIncrement = INCRSYS_WEEK;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case VK_DOWN: // goto next week
|
|
iDirection = 1;
|
|
lIncrement = INCRSYS_WEEK;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case VK_NEXT:
|
|
iDirection = 1;
|
|
if (pmc->fControl) // goto next year
|
|
lIncrement = INCRSYS_YEAR;
|
|
else // goto next month
|
|
lIncrement = INCRSYS_MONTH;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case VK_PRIOR:
|
|
iDirection = -1;
|
|
if (pmc->fControl) // goto previous year
|
|
lIncrement = INCRSYS_YEAR;
|
|
else
|
|
lIncrement = INCRSYS_MONTH; // goto next month
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case VK_HOME:
|
|
if (pmc->fControl) // goto first visible month
|
|
{
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->stMonthFirst, st);
|
|
}
|
|
else // goto first day of current month
|
|
{
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->st, st);
|
|
st.wDay = 1;
|
|
}
|
|
goto setDate;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case VK_END:
|
|
if (pmc->fControl) // goto last visible month
|
|
{
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->stMonthLast, st);
|
|
}
|
|
else // goto last day of current month
|
|
{
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->st, st);
|
|
st.wDay = (WORD) GetDaysForMonth(st.wYear, st.wMonth);
|
|
}
|
|
goto setDate;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
return FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// if we're multiselecting, we need to know which "end" of the selection
|
|
// the user is moving.
|
|
|
|
if (pmc->fMultiSelecting && pmc->fForwardSelect)
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->stEndSel, st);
|
|
else
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->st, st);
|
|
|
|
IncrSystemTime(&st, &st, iDirection, lIncrement);
|
|
|
|
|
|
setDate:
|
|
|
|
// based on the window style and the shift key state,
|
|
// we'll do a multi-select (or not)
|
|
if (MonthCal_IsMultiSelect(pmc) && pmc->fShift)
|
|
{
|
|
pmc->fForwardSelect = (CmpDate(&pmc->st, &pmc->stAnchor) >= 0) ? TRUE : FALSE;
|
|
pmc->fMultiSelecting = TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// otherwise, we'll end multiselect, and set the new anchor
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
pmc->fMultiSelecting = FALSE;
|
|
CopyDate(st, pmc->stAnchor);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (pmc->fFocusDrawn) // erase the focus rect, but don't clear the bit
|
|
{ // so we know to put it back
|
|
hdc = GetDC(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
DrawFocusRect(hdc, &pmc->rcDayCur);
|
|
ReleaseDC(pmc->ci.hwnd, hdc);
|
|
rcCurFocus = pmc->rcDayCur;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
pmc->rcDayOld = pmc->rcDayCur;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (MonthCal_IsMultiSelect(pmc))
|
|
{
|
|
int nDelta = 0;
|
|
|
|
MCHandleMultiSelect(pmc, &st);
|
|
|
|
FScrollIntoView(pmc);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (fRet = MCSetDate(pmc, &st))
|
|
{
|
|
InvalidateRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, &pmc->rcDayOld, FALSE);
|
|
InvalidateRect(pmc->ci.hwnd, &pmc->rcDayCur, FALSE);
|
|
UpdateWindow(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (pmc->fFocusDrawn) // put the focus rect back
|
|
{
|
|
pmc->rcDayOld = pmc->rcDayCur;
|
|
pmc->rcDayCur = rcCurFocus;
|
|
hdc = GetDC(pmc->ci.hwnd);
|
|
DrawFocusRect(hdc, &pmc->rcDayCur);
|
|
ReleaseDC(pmc->ci.hwnd, hdc);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return fRet;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
#if 0 // coming soon
|
|
|
|
LRESULT MCHandleChar(MONTHCAL *pmc, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
|
|
return 0;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Era information is kept in a DPA of LocalAlloc'd strings.
|
|
//
|
|
int MCDPAEnumCallback(LPVOID d, LPVOID p)
|
|
{
|
|
UNREFERENCED_PARAMETER(p);
|
|
if (d)
|
|
LocalFree(d);
|
|
return TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCDPADestroy(HDPA hdpa)
|
|
{
|
|
if (hdpa)
|
|
DPA_DestroyCallback(hdpa, MCDPAEnumCallback, 0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Collect era information.
|
|
//
|
|
// Since EnumCalendarInfo is not thread-safe, we have to take the critical
|
|
// section.
|
|
|
|
HDPA g_hdpaCal;
|
|
|
|
#ifdef WINNT
|
|
BOOL MCEnumCalInfoProc(LPWSTR psz)
|
|
#else
|
|
BOOL MCEnumCalInfoProc(LPSTR psz)
|
|
#endif
|
|
{
|
|
#ifdef UNICODE_WIN9x
|
|
LPWSTR pwszSave = StrDup_AtoW((LPCWSTR)psz);
|
|
#else
|
|
LPWSTR pwszSave = StrDup(psz);
|
|
#endif
|
|
if (pwszSave) {
|
|
if (DPA_AppendPtr(g_hdpaCal, pwszSave) >= 0) {
|
|
return TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
LocalFree(pwszSave);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Out of memory. Bail.
|
|
//
|
|
MCDPADestroy(g_hdpaCal);
|
|
g_hdpaCal = NULL;
|
|
return FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
HDPA MCGetCalInfoDPA(CALID calid, CALTYPE calType)
|
|
{
|
|
HDPA hdpa = DPA_Create(4);
|
|
|
|
ENTERCRITICAL;
|
|
ASSERT(g_hdpaCal == NULL);
|
|
g_hdpaCal = hdpa;
|
|
#ifdef WINNT
|
|
EnumCalendarInfoW(MCEnumCalInfoProc, LOCALE_USER_DEFAULT, calid, calType);
|
|
#else
|
|
EnumCalendarInfoA(MCEnumCalInfoProc, LOCALE_USER_DEFAULT, calid, calType);
|
|
#endif
|
|
hdpa = g_hdpaCal;
|
|
g_hdpaCal = NULL;
|
|
LEAVECRITICAL;
|
|
|
|
return hdpa;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void MCFreeCalendarInfo(PCALENDARTYPE pct)
|
|
{
|
|
MCDPADestroy(pct->hdpaYears);
|
|
MCDPADestroy(pct->hdpaEras);
|
|
pct->hdpaYears = 0;
|
|
pct->hdpaEras = 0;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Get all the era info and validate it so we don't fault when we try to
|
|
// use them.
|
|
//
|
|
BOOL MCGetEraInfo(PCALENDARTYPE pct)
|
|
{
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
pct->hdpaYears = MCGetCalInfoDPA(pct->calid, CAL_IYEAROFFSETRANGE);
|
|
if (!pct->hdpaYears)
|
|
goto Bad;
|
|
|
|
pct->hdpaEras = MCGetCalInfoDPA(pct->calid, CAL_SERASTRING);
|
|
if (!pct->hdpaEras)
|
|
goto Bad;
|
|
|
|
// There must be at least one era...
|
|
if (!DPA_GetPtrCount(pct->hdpaEras))
|
|
goto Bad;
|
|
|
|
// The number of eras must be equal to the number of era names
|
|
if (DPA_GetPtrCount(pct->hdpaEras) != DPA_GetPtrCount(pct->hdpaYears))
|
|
goto Bad;
|
|
|
|
// The era dates must be in descending order.
|
|
for (i = 1; i < DPA_GetPtrCount(pct->hdpaYears); i++)
|
|
{
|
|
if (StrToInt(DPA_FastGetPtr(pct->hdpaYears, i)) >
|
|
StrToInt(DPA_FastGetPtr(pct->hdpaYears, i - 1)))
|
|
goto Bad;
|
|
}
|
|
return TRUE;
|
|
|
|
Bad:
|
|
/*
|
|
* Something went wrong, so clean up.
|
|
*/
|
|
MCFreeCalendarInfo(pct);
|
|
return FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Check to see if this calendar is not supported currently
|
|
//
|
|
// Return FALSE for Hijri, Hebrew calendars, since these are
|
|
// Lunar calndars. This is hack so that this control behaves well when the calendar
|
|
// is any of the non-supported till we add this support to this control. [samera]
|
|
//
|
|
void MCGetCalendarInfo(PCALENDARTYPE pct)
|
|
{
|
|
TCHAR tchCalendar[32];
|
|
CALTYPE defCalendar = CAL_GREGORIAN;
|
|
|
|
if (GetLocaleInfo(LOCALE_USER_DEFAULT,
|
|
LOCALE_ICALENDARTYPE,
|
|
tchCalendar,
|
|
ARRAYSIZE(tchCalendar)))
|
|
{
|
|
defCalendar = StrToInt(tchCalendar);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Start with a clean slate. Assume we don't have to do funky
|
|
// offset stuff (dyrOFfset = 0) or era stuff (hdpaEras = NULL),
|
|
// and that we don't need to do locale munging (LOCALE_USER_DEFAULT).
|
|
//
|
|
MCFreeCalendarInfo(pct);
|
|
ZeroMemory(pct, sizeof(CALTYPE));
|
|
pct->calid = defCalendar;
|
|
pct->lcid = LOCALE_USER_DEFAULT;
|
|
|
|
switch (pct->calid) {
|
|
case CAL_GREGORIAN:
|
|
case CAL_GREGORIAN_US:
|
|
case CAL_GREGORIAN_ME_FRENCH:
|
|
case CAL_GREGORIAN_ARABIC:
|
|
case CAL_GREGORIAN_XLIT_ENGLISH:
|
|
case CAL_GREGORIAN_XLIT_FRENCH:
|
|
break; // Gregorian calendars are just fine
|
|
|
|
case CAL_JAPAN:
|
|
case CAL_TAIWAN:
|
|
//
|
|
// These are era calendars. Go get the era info. Get hdpaEras
|
|
// last so we can use it to test whether we have a supported era
|
|
// calendar.
|
|
//
|
|
// If not enough memory to support traditional calendar, then just
|
|
// force Gregorian. Hey, at least we display *something*.
|
|
//
|
|
if (!MCGetEraInfo(pct))
|
|
goto ForceGregorian;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case CAL_THAI:
|
|
pct->dyrOffset = BUDDHIST_BIAS; // You Just Have To Know this number
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case CAL_KOREA:
|
|
pct->dyrOffset = KOREAN_BIAS; // You Just Have To Know this number
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
//
|
|
// If the calenday isn't supported, then treat it as Gregorian. [samera]
|
|
//
|
|
ForceGregorian:
|
|
pct->calid = CAL_GREGORIAN;
|
|
pct->lcid = MAKELCID(MAKELANGID(LANG_ENGLISH, SUBLANG_ENGLISH_US), SORT_DEFAULT);
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Check whether the date string returned accorind to the
|
|
// current user-locale and calendar setting is Right-To-Left (RTL),
|
|
// and is so the RECTs for month year (@LBUTTONDOWN and NCHITTEST)
|
|
// needs to be adjusted. [samera]
|
|
//
|
|
BOOL MCIsDateStringRTL(TCHAR tch)
|
|
{
|
|
WORD wAttrib=0;
|
|
LCID lcidUserDefault;
|
|
BOOL fRTL = FALSE;
|
|
|
|
lcidUserDefault = GetUserDefaultLCID();
|
|
|
|
if (lcidUserDefault)
|
|
{
|
|
//
|
|
// Return TRUE if the 1st character is a RTL string.
|
|
// A RTL char followed by a european number will
|
|
// display visually as "european-num RTL-string" since the
|
|
// BiDi layout algorithm of the language-pack will do
|
|
// this. [samera]
|
|
//
|
|
if(GetStringTypeEx(lcidUserDefault,
|
|
CT_CTYPE2,
|
|
&tch,
|
|
1,
|
|
&wAttrib))
|
|
{
|
|
if(C2_RIGHTTOLEFT == wAttrib)
|
|
{
|
|
fRTL = TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return fRTL;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
|
|
//
|
|
// Date/Time Picker
|
|
//
|
|
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Subedit wrapper for the various weird things we need to get from NLS.
|
|
//
|
|
// SE_YEARALT means that the year field is only two digits wide
|
|
// in the format string, so we need to perform special Y2K enhancements.
|
|
// For these fields, the field is displayed in two-digit format, but
|
|
// when you go to edit the field, it temporarily changes to four-digit
|
|
// format so you can change the century too. Then when you complete the
|
|
// edit, it returns to two-digit format.
|
|
//
|
|
// The SE_YEARLIKE macro detects either SE_YEAR or SE_YEARALT.
|
|
//
|
|
// SE_MONTHALT is just like SE_MONTH except that it is used
|
|
// when the day (dd) comes before the month (mmm). This is
|
|
// important for languages like Russian where "12 October"
|
|
// and "October 12" use different strings for the word
|
|
// "October". There is no way to get the alternate string
|
|
// directly, except by creating a bogus date format that also
|
|
// has the day before the month, then throwing away the day.
|
|
//
|
|
// For example, if the incoming date string is
|
|
//
|
|
// "MMMM dd yyyy"
|
|
//
|
|
// we break it up into
|
|
//
|
|
// "MMMM" SE_MONTH
|
|
// " " SE_STATIC
|
|
// "dd" SE_DAY
|
|
// " " SE_STATIC
|
|
// "yyyy" SE_YEAR
|
|
//
|
|
// However, if the incoming date is
|
|
//
|
|
// "dd MMMM yyyy"
|
|
//
|
|
// we break it up into
|
|
//
|
|
// "dd" SE_DAY
|
|
// " " SE_STATIC
|
|
// "ddMMMM" SE_MONTHALT
|
|
// " " SE_STATIC
|
|
// "yyyy" SE_YEAR
|
|
//
|
|
// The extra "dd" at the beginning of SE_MONTHALT is stripped out below.
|
|
//
|
|
// Y2K weirdness: If we are getting the date format for the year,
|
|
// and the year is being edited (either due to a SUBEDIT_ALL or because
|
|
// it is the active subedit), and the format year is only
|
|
// two digits, then force a four-digit year for editing purposes.
|
|
//
|
|
//
|
|
void SEGetTimeDateFormat(LPSUBEDIT pse, LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec, LPTSTR pszBuf, DWORD cchBuf)
|
|
{
|
|
int cch;
|
|
|
|
ASSERT(cchBuf >= 2); // We assume it can hold at least space and a null
|
|
pszBuf[0] = TEXT('\0'); // In case something fails
|
|
|
|
if (pse->id == SE_MONTHALT) {
|
|
TCHAR tszBuf[DTP_FORMATLENGTH + 3];
|
|
//
|
|
// When we parsed the date string and realized that we needed
|
|
// the Alternate Month format, we created a date format of
|
|
// the form "ddMMM...", where "MMM..." is the
|
|
// the original month format. Here we strip off the digits.
|
|
//
|
|
cch = GetDateFormat(psec->ct.lcid, 0, &psec->st, pse->pv, tszBuf, ARRAYSIZE(tszBuf));
|
|
if (cch >= 2) {
|
|
// [msadek] For Hebrew calander, day format "dd" is actually
|
|
// two OR THREE characters. Don't hardcode it as 2.
|
|
int cchDay = GetDateFormat(psec->ct.lcid, 0, &psec->st, TEXT("dd"), NULL, 0);
|
|
lstrcpyn(pszBuf, tszBuf + cchDay - 1, cchBuf);
|
|
}
|
|
} else if (pse->id == SE_YEARALT &&
|
|
(psec->iseCur == SUBEDIT_ALL || pse == &psec->pse[psec->iseCur])) {
|
|
GetDateFormat(psec->ct.lcid, 0, &psec->st, TEXT("yyyy"), pszBuf, cchBuf);
|
|
} else if (SE_DATELIKE(pse->id)) {
|
|
GetDateFormat(psec->ct.lcid, 0, &psec->st, pse->pv, pszBuf, cchBuf);
|
|
|
|
// Change a blank era to a space so the user can see it
|
|
if (pse->id == SE_ERA && pszBuf[0] == TEXT('\0')) {
|
|
pszBuf[0] = TEXT(' ');
|
|
pszBuf[1] = TEXT('\0');
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
} else if (pse->id != SE_APP) {
|
|
GetTimeFormat(LOCALE_USER_DEFAULT, 0, &psec->st, pse->pv, pszBuf, cchBuf);
|
|
} else {
|
|
|
|
NMDATETIMEFORMAT nmdtf = { 0 };
|
|
nmdtf.pszFormat = pse->pv;
|
|
SECGetSystemtime(psec, &nmdtf.st);
|
|
nmdtf.pszDisplay = nmdtf.szDisplay;
|
|
|
|
CCSendNotify(psec->pci, DTN_FORMAT, &nmdtf.nmhdr);
|
|
|
|
lstrcpyn(pszBuf, nmdtf.pszDisplay, cchBuf);
|
|
|
|
#ifdef UNICODE
|
|
//
|
|
// If the parent is an ANSI window, and pszDisplay
|
|
// does not equal szDisplay, the then thunk had to
|
|
// allocated memory for pszDisplay. We need to
|
|
// free it here.
|
|
//
|
|
|
|
if (!psec->pci->bUnicode && nmdtf.pszDisplay &&
|
|
nmdtf.pszDisplay != nmdtf.szDisplay) {
|
|
LocalFree ((LPSTR)nmdtf.pszDisplay);
|
|
}
|
|
#endif
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// SUBEDIT stuff for DateTimePicker
|
|
//
|
|
// NOTE: Now that the DatePicker and TimePicker are combined,
|
|
// this could be moved back into the parent structure.
|
|
//
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Used in an era calendar to get the length of the longest era name.
|
|
// Also leaves a random heigth in psize->cy because that's what the
|
|
// non-era code does, too.
|
|
//
|
|
int SECGetMaxEraLength(PCALENDARTYPE pct, HDC hdc, PSIZE psize)
|
|
{
|
|
int i;
|
|
int wid = 0;
|
|
for (i = 0; i < DPA_GetPtrCount(pct->hdpaEras); i++)
|
|
{
|
|
LPCTSTR ptsz = DPA_FastGetPtr(pct->hdpaEras, i);
|
|
if (GetTextExtentPoint32(hdc, ptsz, lstrlen(ptsz), psize) &&
|
|
psize->cx > wid)
|
|
{
|
|
wid = psize->cx;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
return wid;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
// SECRecomputeSizing needs to calculate the maximum rectangle each subedit can be. Ugh.
|
|
//
|
|
// The size of the SE_YEARALT field changes depending on whether or not it is
|
|
// the current psec->iseCur. Double ugh.
|
|
|
|
void SECRecomputeSizing(LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec, LPRECT prc)
|
|
{
|
|
HDC hdc;
|
|
HGDIOBJ hfontOrig;
|
|
int i;
|
|
LPSUBEDIT pse;
|
|
int left = prc->left;
|
|
|
|
psec->rc = *prc;
|
|
|
|
hdc = GetDC(psec->pci->hwnd);
|
|
hfontOrig = SelectObject(hdc, (HGDIOBJ)psec->hfont);
|
|
|
|
for (i=0, pse=psec->pse; i < psec->cse ; i++, pse++)
|
|
{
|
|
TCHAR szTmp[DTP_FORMATLENGTH];
|
|
LPCTSTR sz;
|
|
int min, max;
|
|
SIZE size;
|
|
int wid;
|
|
|
|
min = pse->min;
|
|
max = pse->max;
|
|
if (pse->id == SE_STATIC)
|
|
{
|
|
ASSERT(pse->fReadOnly);
|
|
sz = pse->pv;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
sz = szTmp;
|
|
|
|
// make some assumptions so we don't loop more than we have to
|
|
switch (pse->id)
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
// we only need seven for the text days of the week
|
|
case SE_DAY:
|
|
min = 10; // make them all double-digit
|
|
max = 17;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
// Assume we only have numeric output with all chars same width
|
|
case SE_MARK:
|
|
min = 11;
|
|
max = 12;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case SE_HOUR:
|
|
case SE_YEAR:
|
|
case SE_YEARALT:
|
|
case SE_MINUTE:
|
|
case SE_SECOND:
|
|
min = max;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case SE_ERA:
|
|
if (ISERACALENDAR(&psec->ct)) {
|
|
wid = SECGetMaxEraLength(&psec->ct, hdc, &size);
|
|
goto HaveWidth;
|
|
} else {
|
|
min = max = *pse->pval; // current value is good enough
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// now get max width
|
|
if (pse->id == SE_APP)
|
|
{
|
|
NMDATETIMEFORMATQUERY nmdtfq = {0};
|
|
|
|
nmdtfq.pszFormat = pse->pv;
|
|
|
|
CCSendNotify(psec->pci, DTN_FORMATQUERY, &nmdtfq.nmhdr);
|
|
|
|
size = nmdtfq.szMax;
|
|
wid = nmdtfq.szMax.cx;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
SYSTEMTIME st = psec->st;
|
|
|
|
/*
|
|
* SUBTLE - Munge the month/day to January 1. This solves
|
|
* lots of problems, such as "Today is Feb 29 1996, and
|
|
* when we iterate through year = 1997, we get Feb 29 1997,
|
|
* which is invalid." Or "Today is Jan 31 1999, and when
|
|
* we iterate through the months, we get Sep 31 1999, which
|
|
* is invalid."
|
|
*
|
|
* We choose "January 1" because
|
|
*
|
|
* 1. Every year has a "January 1", so the year can vary.
|
|
* 2. Every month has a "first", so the month can vary.
|
|
* 3. Every day up to 31 is valid in January, so the day can vary.
|
|
*/
|
|
psec->st.wMonth = psec->st.wDay = 1;
|
|
|
|
for (wid = 0 ; min <= max ; min++)
|
|
{
|
|
if (pse->id != SE_STATIC)
|
|
{
|
|
*pse->pval = (WORD) min;
|
|
|
|
SEGetTimeDateFormat(pse, psec, szTmp, ARRAYSIZE(szTmp));
|
|
if (szTmp[0] == TEXT('\0'))
|
|
{
|
|
DebugMsg(TF_ERROR, TEXT("SECRecomputeSizing: GetDate/TimeFormat([%s] y=%d m=%d d=%d h=%d m=%d s=%d) = ERROR %d"),
|
|
pse->pv, psec->st.wYear, psec->st.wMonth, psec->st.wDay, psec->st.wHour, psec->st.wMinute, psec->st.wSecond,
|
|
GetLastError());
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
if (!GetTextExtentPoint32(hdc, sz, lstrlen(sz), &size))
|
|
{
|
|
size.cx = 0;
|
|
DebugMsg(TF_MONTHCAL,TEXT("SECRecomputeSizing: GetTextExtentPoint32(%s) = ERROR %d"), sz, GetLastError());
|
|
}
|
|
if (size.cx > wid)
|
|
wid = size.cx;
|
|
}
|
|
psec->st = st;
|
|
}
|
|
HaveWidth:
|
|
// now set up subedit's bounding rectangle
|
|
pse->rc.top = prc->top + SECYBORDER;
|
|
pse->rc.bottom = pse->rc.top + size.cy;
|
|
pse->rc.left = left;
|
|
pse->rc.right = left + wid;
|
|
left = pse->rc.right;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
SelectObject(hdc, hfontOrig);
|
|
ReleaseDC(psec->pci->hwnd, hdc);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// InitSubEditControl parses szFormat into psec, setting the time to pst.
|
|
TCHAR c_szFormats[] = TEXT("gyMdthHmsX");
|
|
BOOL PASCAL SECParseFormat(DATEPICK* pdp, LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec, LPCTSTR szFormat)
|
|
{
|
|
LPCTSTR pFmt;
|
|
LPTSTR psecFmt;
|
|
int cse, cchExtra;
|
|
int nTmp;
|
|
LPSUBEDIT pse;
|
|
BOOL fDaySeen = FALSE;
|
|
BOOL fForceCentury = FALSE;
|
|
int iLen, i;
|
|
TCHAR tch;
|
|
LPTSTR pFmtTemp;
|
|
TCHAR szFormatTemp[DTP_FORMATLENGTH];
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// We need to force the century if the format is
|
|
// DTS_SHORTDATECENTURYFORMAT.
|
|
//
|
|
if (pdp->fLocale &&
|
|
(pdp->ci.style & DTS_FORMATMASK) == DTS_SHORTDATECENTURYFORMAT)
|
|
{
|
|
fForceCentury = TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// [msadek]; If we need to mirror the format and the
|
|
// cleint passed a read only buffer, we will AV (W2k bug# 354533)
|
|
// Let's copy it first
|
|
|
|
if (psec->fMirrorSEC)
|
|
{
|
|
lstrcpyn(szFormatTemp, szFormat, ARRAYSIZE(szFormatTemp));
|
|
szFormat = szFormatTemp;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// count szFormat sections so we know what to allocate
|
|
pFmt = szFormat;
|
|
cse = 0;
|
|
cchExtra = 0;
|
|
while (*pFmt)
|
|
{
|
|
if (StrChr(c_szFormats, *pFmt)) // format string
|
|
{
|
|
TCHAR c = *pFmt;
|
|
while (c == *pFmt)
|
|
pFmt++;
|
|
cse++;
|
|
|
|
// If it was a string Month format, reserve 2 more chars for
|
|
// the possible "dd" leader, in case we need SE_MONTHALT.
|
|
if (c == TEXT('M'))
|
|
cchExtra += 2;
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
else if (*pFmt == TEXT('\'')) // quoted static string
|
|
{
|
|
KeepSearching:
|
|
pFmt++;
|
|
while (*pFmt && *pFmt != TEXT('\''))
|
|
pFmt++;
|
|
if (*pFmt) // handle poorly quoted strings
|
|
{
|
|
pFmt++;
|
|
if (*pFmt == TEXT('\'')) // quoted quote, not end of quote
|
|
goto KeepSearching;
|
|
}
|
|
cse++;
|
|
}
|
|
else // static string probably a delimiter
|
|
{
|
|
while (*pFmt && *pFmt!=TEXT('\'') && !StrChr(c_szFormats, *pFmt))
|
|
pFmt++;
|
|
cse++;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Allocate space
|
|
nTmp = cse + lstrlen(szFormat) + cchExtra + 1; // number of chars
|
|
nTmp = nTmp * sizeof(TCHAR); // size in BYTES
|
|
nTmp = ROUND_TO_POINTER(nTmp); // round up to POINTER boundary
|
|
psecFmt = (LPTSTR)LocalAlloc(LPTR, nTmp + cse * sizeof(SUBEDIT));
|
|
if (!psecFmt)
|
|
{
|
|
DebugMsg(TF_MONTHCAL, TEXT("SECParseFormat failed to allocate memory"));
|
|
return FALSE; // use whatever we already have
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (psec->szFormat)
|
|
LocalFree(psec->szFormat);
|
|
|
|
psec->szFormat = psecFmt;
|
|
psec->cDelimeter = '\0';
|
|
psec->pse = (LPSUBEDIT)((LPBYTE)psecFmt + nTmp);
|
|
|
|
// Fill psec
|
|
psec->iseCur = SUBEDIT_NONE;
|
|
psec->cse = cse;
|
|
pse = psec->pse;
|
|
ZeroMemory(pse, cse * sizeof(SUBEDIT));
|
|
pFmt = szFormat;
|
|
pdp->fHasMark = FALSE;
|
|
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Before start parsing the format string, let's mirror it if requested.
|
|
//
|
|
if (psec->fMirrorSEC)
|
|
{
|
|
pFmtTemp = (LPTSTR)pFmt;
|
|
iLen = lstrlen(pFmtTemp);
|
|
for( i=0 ; i<iLen/2 ; i++ )
|
|
{
|
|
tch = pFmtTemp[i];
|
|
pFmtTemp[i] = pFmtTemp[iLen-i-1];
|
|
pFmtTemp[iLen-i-1] = tch;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
while (*pFmt)
|
|
{
|
|
pse->flDrawText = DT_CENTER;
|
|
|
|
if (*pFmt == TEXT('y') || *pFmt == TEXT('g')) // y=year g=era
|
|
{
|
|
TCHAR ch = *pFmt;
|
|
|
|
// If the calendar doesn't use eras, then the era field is just
|
|
// for show and can't be changed.
|
|
if (ch == TEXT('g') && !ISERACALENDAR(&psec->ct)) {
|
|
pse->fReadOnly = TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
pse->id = ch == TEXT('y') ? SE_YEAR : SE_ERA;
|
|
pse->pval = &psec->st.wYear;
|
|
pse->min = c_stEpoch.wYear;
|
|
pse->max = c_stArmageddon.wYear;
|
|
pse->cchMax = 0;
|
|
|
|
pse->pv = psecFmt;
|
|
while (*pFmt == ch) {
|
|
pse->cchMax++;
|
|
*psecFmt++ = *pFmt++;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (pse->id == SE_YEAR)
|
|
{
|
|
pse->flDrawText = DT_RIGHT;
|
|
|
|
if (fForceCentury)
|
|
{
|
|
pse->pv = TEXT("yyyy");
|
|
pse->cchMax = 4;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
switch (pse->cchMax)
|
|
{
|
|
case 1: // "y" is a SE_YEARALT
|
|
case 2: // "yy" is a SE_YEARALT
|
|
pse->id = SE_YEARALT;
|
|
pse->cchMax = 4; // Force four-digit editing
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case 3: // "yyy" is an alias for "yyyy".
|
|
pse->cchMax = 4;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
*psecFmt++ = TEXT('\0');
|
|
}
|
|
else if (*pFmt == TEXT('M')) // month
|
|
{
|
|
pse->pv = psecFmt;
|
|
|
|
// If the day has been seen, then we need to use the alternate
|
|
// month format, so set up the gratuitous "dd" prefix.
|
|
// See SEGetTimeDateFormat.
|
|
//
|
|
if (fDaySeen) {
|
|
pse->id = SE_MONTHALT;
|
|
*psecFmt++ = TEXT('d');
|
|
*psecFmt++ = TEXT('d');
|
|
} else {
|
|
pse->id = SE_MONTH;
|
|
}
|
|
pse->pval = &psec->st.wMonth;
|
|
pse->min = 1;
|
|
pse->max = 12;
|
|
pse->cchMax = 2;
|
|
|
|
while (*pFmt == TEXT('M'))
|
|
*psecFmt++ = *pFmt++;
|
|
if (psecFmt - pse->pv <= 2)
|
|
pse->flDrawText = DT_RIGHT;
|
|
*psecFmt++ = TEXT('\0');
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
#if 0 // if we ever do week-of-year format
|
|
else if (*pFmt == TEXT('w')) // week
|
|
{
|
|
// BUGBUG: NLS date functions can modify the displayed YEAR if the displayed WEEK overflows
|
|
// into the next or prior year!
|
|
// BUGBUG: We need to make the week increment move beyond month boundries...
|
|
// In order to do this, we need to add an "overflow" flag so day increments will
|
|
// carry into month increments etc.
|
|
|
|
pse->id = SE_DAY;
|
|
pse->pval = &psec->st.wDay;
|
|
pse->min = 1;
|
|
pse->max = GetDaysForMonth(psec->st.wYear, psec->st.wMonth);
|
|
pse->cIncrement = 7;
|
|
pse->cchMax = 2;
|
|
|
|
pse->pv = psecFmt;
|
|
while (*pFmt == TEXT('w'))
|
|
*psecFmt++ = *pFmt++;
|
|
*psecFmt++ = TEXT('\0');
|
|
}
|
|
#endif
|
|
else if (*pFmt == TEXT('d')) // day or day of week
|
|
{
|
|
fDaySeen = TRUE; // See SEGetTimeDateFormat
|
|
pse->id = SE_DAY;
|
|
pse->pval = &psec->st.wDay;
|
|
pse->min = 1;
|
|
pse->max = GetDaysForMonth(psec->st.wYear, psec->st.wMonth);
|
|
pse->cchMax = 2;
|
|
|
|
pse->pv = psecFmt;
|
|
while (*pFmt == TEXT('d'))
|
|
*psecFmt++ = *pFmt++;
|
|
if (psecFmt - pse->pv <= 2)
|
|
pse->flDrawText = DT_RIGHT; // day
|
|
else
|
|
pse->fReadOnly = TRUE; // day of week
|
|
*psecFmt++ = TEXT('\0');
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
else if (*pFmt == TEXT('t')) // marker
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->fHasMark = TRUE;
|
|
pse->id = SE_MARK;
|
|
pse->pval = &psec->st.wHour;
|
|
pse->min = 0;
|
|
pse->max = 23;
|
|
pse->cIncrement = 12;
|
|
pse->cchMax = 2;
|
|
|
|
pse->pv = psecFmt;
|
|
while (*pFmt == TEXT('t'))
|
|
*psecFmt++ = *pFmt++;
|
|
*psecFmt++ = TEXT('\0');
|
|
}
|
|
else if (*pFmt == TEXT('h')) // (12) hour
|
|
{
|
|
pse->id = SE_HOUR;
|
|
pse->pval = &psec->st.wHour;
|
|
pse->min = 0;
|
|
pse->max = 23;
|
|
pse->cchMax = 2;
|
|
pse->flDrawText = DT_RIGHT;
|
|
|
|
pse->pv = psecFmt;
|
|
while (*pFmt == TEXT('h'))
|
|
*psecFmt++ = *pFmt++;
|
|
*psecFmt++ = TEXT('\0');
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
else if (*pFmt == TEXT('H')) // (24) hour
|
|
{
|
|
pse->id = SE_HOUR;
|
|
pse->pval = &psec->st.wHour;
|
|
pse->min = 0;
|
|
pse->max = 23;
|
|
pse->cchMax = 2;
|
|
pse->flDrawText = DT_RIGHT;
|
|
|
|
pse->pv = psecFmt;
|
|
while (*pFmt == TEXT('H'))
|
|
*psecFmt++ = *pFmt++;
|
|
*psecFmt++ = TEXT('\0');
|
|
}
|
|
else if (*pFmt == TEXT('m')) // minute
|
|
{
|
|
pse->id = SE_MINUTE;
|
|
pse->pval = &psec->st.wMinute;
|
|
pse->min = 0;
|
|
pse->max = 59;
|
|
pse->cchMax = 2;
|
|
pse->flDrawText = DT_RIGHT;
|
|
|
|
pse->pv = psecFmt;
|
|
while (*pFmt == TEXT('m'))
|
|
*psecFmt++ = *pFmt++;
|
|
*psecFmt++ = TEXT('\0');
|
|
}
|
|
else if (*pFmt == TEXT('s')) // second
|
|
{
|
|
pse->id = SE_SECOND;
|
|
pse->pval = &psec->st.wSecond;
|
|
pse->min = 0;
|
|
pse->max = 59;
|
|
pse->cchMax = 2;
|
|
pse->flDrawText = DT_RIGHT;
|
|
|
|
pse->pv = psecFmt;
|
|
while (*pFmt == TEXT('s'))
|
|
*psecFmt++ = *pFmt++;
|
|
*psecFmt++ = TEXT('\0');
|
|
}
|
|
else if (*pFmt == TEXT('X')) // app specified field
|
|
{
|
|
pse->id = SE_APP;
|
|
|
|
pse->pv = psecFmt;
|
|
while (*pFmt == TEXT('X'))
|
|
*psecFmt++ = *pFmt++;
|
|
*psecFmt++ = TEXT('\0');
|
|
}
|
|
else if (*pFmt == TEXT('\'')) // quoted static string
|
|
{
|
|
pse->id = SE_STATIC;
|
|
pse->fReadOnly = TRUE;
|
|
|
|
pse->pv = psecFmt;
|
|
SearchSomeMore:
|
|
pFmt++;
|
|
while (*pFmt && *pFmt != TEXT('\''))
|
|
*psecFmt++ = *pFmt++;
|
|
if (*pFmt) // handle poorly quoted strings
|
|
{
|
|
pFmt++;
|
|
if (*pFmt == TEXT('\'')) // quoted quote, not end of quote
|
|
{
|
|
*psecFmt++ = *pFmt;
|
|
goto SearchSomeMore;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
*psecFmt++ = TEXT('\0');
|
|
}
|
|
else // unknown non-editable stuff (most likely a delimeter)
|
|
{
|
|
// BUGBUG: even though it's unknown, we should probably pass
|
|
// it off to GetDateFormat so we will be forward compatible
|
|
// with future date formats...
|
|
//
|
|
pse->id = SE_STATIC;
|
|
pse->fReadOnly = TRUE;
|
|
|
|
if (!psec->cDelimeter)
|
|
psec->cDelimeter = *pFmt;
|
|
|
|
pse->pv = psecFmt;
|
|
while (*pFmt && *pFmt!=TEXT('\'') && !StrChr(c_szFormats, *pFmt))
|
|
*psecFmt++ = *pFmt++;
|
|
*psecFmt++ = TEXT('\0');
|
|
|
|
// we'll assume that the first not formatting char is the
|
|
// delimeter...maybe not a great assumption, but it will work
|
|
// most of the time.
|
|
//
|
|
}
|
|
pse++;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG
|
|
{
|
|
TCHAR sz[200];
|
|
LPTSTR psz;
|
|
psz = sz;
|
|
sz[0]=TEXT('\0');
|
|
pse = psec->pse;
|
|
cse = psec->cse;
|
|
while (cse > 0)
|
|
{
|
|
wsprintf(psz, TEXT("[%s] "), pse->pv);
|
|
psz = psz + lstrlen(psz);
|
|
cse--;
|
|
pse++;
|
|
}
|
|
DebugMsg(TF_MONTHCAL, TEXT("SECParseFormat: %s"), sz);
|
|
}
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Let restore the original format
|
|
//
|
|
if (psec->fMirrorSEC)
|
|
{
|
|
pFmtTemp = (LPTSTR)szFormat;
|
|
for( i=0 ; i<iLen/2 ; i++ )
|
|
{
|
|
tch = pFmtTemp[i];
|
|
pFmtTemp[i] = pFmtTemp[iLen-i-1];
|
|
pFmtTemp[iLen-i-1] = tch;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// If this is a time-only DTP control and we need to swap the AM/PM symbol
|
|
// to the other side, then let's do it.
|
|
//
|
|
if (psec->fSwapTimeMarker)
|
|
{
|
|
SUBEDIT se;
|
|
pse = psec->pse;
|
|
cse = psec->cse;
|
|
|
|
if ((cse > 1) && (psec->pse[0].id == SE_MARK))
|
|
{
|
|
se = psec->pse[0];
|
|
i = 0;
|
|
while( i < (cse-1) )
|
|
{
|
|
pse[i] = pse[i+1];
|
|
i++;
|
|
}
|
|
pse[psec->cse-1] = se;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// The subedits have changed, recompute sizes
|
|
SECRecomputeSizing(psec, &psec->rc);
|
|
|
|
// We're going to need to redraw this
|
|
InvalidateRect(psec->pci->hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
|
|
// Changing the format also changes the window text.
|
|
MyNotifyWinEvent(EVENT_OBJECT_NAMECHANGE, pdp->ci.hwnd, OBJID_WINDOW, INDEXID_CONTAINER);
|
|
return TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void SECDestroy(LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec)
|
|
{
|
|
if (psec->szFormat)
|
|
{
|
|
LocalFree(psec->szFormat);
|
|
psec->szFormat = NULL;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
void SECSetFont(LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec, HFONT hfont)
|
|
{
|
|
if (hfont == NULL)
|
|
hfont = (HFONT)GetStockObject(DEFAULT_GUI_FONT);
|
|
psec->hfont = hfont;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void InvalidateScrollRect(HWND hwnd, RECT *prc, int xScroll)
|
|
{
|
|
RECT rc;
|
|
|
|
if (xScroll)
|
|
{
|
|
rc = *prc;
|
|
OffsetRect(&rc, -xScroll, 0);
|
|
prc = &rc;
|
|
}
|
|
InvalidateRect(hwnd, prc, TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void SECSaveResetSubeditEdit(DATEPICK *pdp, BOOL fReset);
|
|
#define SECSaveSubeditEdit(pdp) SECSaveResetSubeditEdit(pdp, FALSE)
|
|
#define SECResetSubeditEdit(pdp) SECSaveResetSubeditEdit(pdp, TRUE)
|
|
|
|
// Set the current subedit, scrolling things into view as needed
|
|
void SECSetCurSubed(DATEPICK *pdp, int isubed)
|
|
{
|
|
LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec = &pdp->sec;
|
|
|
|
// validate the arguments
|
|
ASSERT(isubed < psec->cse);
|
|
|
|
// if the subedit is changing, we need to invalidate stuff
|
|
if (isubed != psec->iseCur)
|
|
{
|
|
int isePre;
|
|
if (psec->iseCur >= 0)
|
|
{
|
|
SECResetSubeditEdit(pdp);
|
|
InvalidateScrollRect(psec->pci->hwnd, &psec->pse[psec->iseCur].rc, psec->xScroll);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
isePre = psec->iseCur;
|
|
psec->iseCur = isubed;
|
|
// For perf reasons, do a full recompute only if SE_YEARALT or
|
|
// SUBEDIT_ALL was involved, since those are the only cases
|
|
// where SE_YEARALT fields change size.
|
|
|
|
#define YearAffected(psec, ise) \
|
|
(ise == SUBEDIT_ALL || \
|
|
(ise >= 0 && psec->pse[ise].id == SE_YEARALT))
|
|
|
|
if (YearAffected(psec, isePre) || YearAffected(psec, isubed))
|
|
{
|
|
SECRecomputeSizing(psec, &psec->rc);
|
|
InvalidateRect(psec->pci->hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
#undef YearAffected
|
|
|
|
if (psec->iseCur >= 0)
|
|
{
|
|
RECT rc = psec->pse[psec->iseCur].rc;
|
|
OffsetRect(&rc, -psec->xScroll, 0);
|
|
if (rc.left < psec->rc.left)
|
|
{
|
|
psec->xScroll += rc.left - psec->rc.left;
|
|
InvalidateRect(psec->pci->hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (rc.right > psec->rc.right)
|
|
{
|
|
psec->xScroll += rc.right - psec->rc.right;
|
|
InvalidateRect(psec->pci->hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
InvalidateRect(psec->pci->hwnd, &rc, TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
int SECIncrFocus(DATEPICK *pdp, int delta)
|
|
{
|
|
int ise, loop;
|
|
LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec = &pdp->sec;
|
|
|
|
ASSERT(-1 == delta || 1 == delta);
|
|
|
|
ise = psec->iseCur;
|
|
if (ise < 0 && delta < 0)
|
|
ise = psec->cse;
|
|
|
|
for (loop = 0 ; loop < psec->cse ; loop++)
|
|
{
|
|
int oldise = ise;
|
|
ise = (ise + delta + psec->cse) % psec->cse;
|
|
if (ise != oldise+delta && psec->fNone)
|
|
{
|
|
// we wrapped and we allow scrolling into SUBEDIT_NONE state
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
if (!psec->pse[ise].fReadOnly)
|
|
{
|
|
goto Found;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
ise = SUBEDIT_NONE;
|
|
Found:
|
|
SECSetCurSubed(pdp, ise);
|
|
return ise;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void SECInvalidate(LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec, int id);
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Given a Gregorian year, get the local name for that year.
|
|
//
|
|
UINT SECGetYearValue(DATEPICK *pdp, UINT uYear)
|
|
{
|
|
UINT uiRc = 0;
|
|
TCHAR rgch[64];
|
|
if (EVAL(MCGetDateFormatWithTempYear(&pdp->sec.ct, &pdp->sec.st, TEXT("yyyy"), uYear, rgch, ARRAYSIZE(rgch)))) {
|
|
uiRc = StrToInt(rgch);
|
|
}
|
|
return uiRc;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// SECAdjustByEra
|
|
//
|
|
// pct - PCALENDARTYPE structure to use for conversion
|
|
//
|
|
// uInput - the value the user typed (to be interpreted as local calendar)
|
|
//
|
|
// The basic idea is that if you type a year, it is interpreted relative
|
|
// to the era you were in previously. If the number you typed isn't valid
|
|
// for that era, then reject it (by returning the original year unchanged).
|
|
//
|
|
UINT SECAdjustByEra(DATEPICK *pdp, UINT uInput)
|
|
{
|
|
UINT uResult = pdp->sec.st.wYear;
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Find the delta between the current local year and the current
|
|
// Gregorian year. We don't use any of the era transition dates
|
|
// since they aren't reliable at the boundaries. Just convert it
|
|
// to a display name and re-parse it back.
|
|
//
|
|
UINT uDelta = pdp->sec.st.wYear - SECGetYearValue(pdp, pdp->sec.st.wYear);
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Apply that delta to the year the user typed in. This converts the
|
|
// local year into a Gregorian year.
|
|
//
|
|
UINT uNewVal = uInput + uDelta;
|
|
|
|
// uNewVal is the value we want to change it to. If it's valid for that
|
|
// era, then use it. We detect that it's okay for the era by converting
|
|
// it to a display name and seeing if it matches. It can fail for being
|
|
// too large (past the end of the era) or too small (trying to change to
|
|
// January 1 local year 1 when the era didn't change until March).
|
|
|
|
if (SECGetYearValue(pdp, uNewVal) == uInput) {
|
|
uResult = uNewVal;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return uResult;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// SECAdjustByType
|
|
//
|
|
// Some field types are special.
|
|
//
|
|
// SE_YEAR or SE_YEARALT if user typed only two digits
|
|
//
|
|
// Use the "implied century for two-digit years" logic
|
|
// as described in NT5_GetCalendarInfoA.
|
|
//
|
|
// SE_YEAR or SE_YEARALT if user typed more than two digits
|
|
//
|
|
// Use that number.
|
|
//
|
|
// BONUS FEATURE!
|
|
//
|
|
// Some calendars run parallel to the Gregorian year,
|
|
// but with different years. Use GregorianToOther and
|
|
// OtherToGregorian to convert.
|
|
//
|
|
// The input value is the local year (Gregorian, Buddhist, whatever)
|
|
// but the return value is always the Gregorian year, since that's
|
|
// what SYSTEMTIME uses.
|
|
//
|
|
// SE_HOUR
|
|
//
|
|
// If the clock is in 12-hour format, then preserve AM/PM ness of
|
|
// the hour. For example, if it was 3pm and somebody is changing
|
|
// the hour to 4, use 4pm instead of 4am.
|
|
//
|
|
UINT SECAdjustByType(DATEPICK *pdp, LPSUBEDIT psubed, UINT uNewValue)
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
if (SE_YEARLIKE(psubed->id))
|
|
{
|
|
if (uNewValue < 100)
|
|
{
|
|
// Get the preferred century of the preferred calendar
|
|
// (in the localized year, not Gregorian.)
|
|
DWORD dwMax2DigitYear;
|
|
if (!NT5_GetCalendarInfoA(pdp->sec.ct.lcid, pdp->sec.ct.calid, CAL_RETURN_NUMBER + CAL_ITWODIGITYEARMAX,
|
|
NULL, 0, &dwMax2DigitYear))
|
|
{
|
|
// default in the absence of all information
|
|
dwMax2DigitYear = GregorianToOther(&pdp->sec.ct, 2029);
|
|
|
|
// if the current year in this era is less than 100, then the 2 digits typed
|
|
// may be the real date, so set the max to 99 (i.e., no conversion)
|
|
//
|
|
if (dwMax2DigitYear < 99)
|
|
dwMax2DigitYear = 99;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Copy the century of dwMax2DigitYear into uNewValue.
|
|
//
|
|
uNewValue += (dwMax2DigitYear - dwMax2DigitYear % 100);
|
|
//
|
|
// If it exceeds the max, then drop to previous century.
|
|
//
|
|
if (uNewValue > dwMax2DigitYear)
|
|
uNewValue -= 100;
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Finally, convert back to Gregorian as necessary.
|
|
//
|
|
uNewValue = OtherToGregorian(&pdp->sec.ct, uNewValue);
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// If we are in an Era calendar, then we need to adjust the
|
|
// year relative to the ambient era.
|
|
//
|
|
if (ISERACALENDAR(&pdp->sec.ct)) {
|
|
uNewValue = SECAdjustByEra(pdp, uNewValue);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
} else if (psubed->id == SE_HOUR && psubed->pv[0] == TEXT('h')) {
|
|
if (*psubed->pval >= 12 && uNewValue < 12)
|
|
uNewValue += 12;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return uNewValue;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
void SECSetSubeditValue(DATEPICK *pdp, LPSUBEDIT psubed, UINT uNewValue, BOOL fForce)
|
|
{
|
|
LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec = &pdp->sec;
|
|
UINT uOldValue;
|
|
|
|
uNewValue = SECAdjustByType(pdp, psubed, uNewValue);
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Must do a full-on range check in addition to the simple psubed->min
|
|
// psubed->max range check because the new value might be valid
|
|
// for our range but not in the global scheme of things. For example,
|
|
// the minimum date is Sep 14 1752, but if today is Jan 1 1995 and
|
|
// the user types "1752", that will pass the simple min/max year test,
|
|
// but it's not a valid date since Jan 1 1752 is out of range.
|
|
//
|
|
|
|
uOldValue = *psubed->pval;
|
|
*psubed->pval = (WORD)uNewValue;
|
|
if (uNewValue >= psubed->min && uNewValue <= psubed->max &&
|
|
CmpSystemtime(&pdp->sec.st, &pdp->stMin) >= 0 &&
|
|
CmpSystemtime(&pdp->sec.st, &pdp->stMax) <= 0)
|
|
{
|
|
if (fForce || uNewValue != uOldValue)
|
|
{
|
|
SECInvalidate(psec, SE_APP);
|
|
InvalidateScrollRect(psec->pci->hwnd, &psubed->rc, psec->xScroll);
|
|
|
|
DPNotifyDateChange(pdp);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
// Oops, not valid, put the old value back
|
|
*psubed->pval = (WORD)uOldValue;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// This saves the current pending value and also resets the edit state
|
|
// if fReset is TRUE
|
|
void SECSaveResetSubeditEdit(DATEPICK *pdp, BOOL fReset)
|
|
{
|
|
LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec = &pdp->sec;
|
|
|
|
if (psec->iseCur >= 0)
|
|
{
|
|
LPSUBEDIT psubed = &psec->pse[psec->iseCur];
|
|
|
|
if (psubed->cchEdit)
|
|
{
|
|
SECSetSubeditValue(pdp, psubed, psubed->valEdit, FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
if (fReset)
|
|
psubed->cchEdit = 0;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// SECInvalidate invalidates the display for each subedit affected by a change
|
|
// to ID. NOTE: as a side affect, it recalculates MAX fields for all subedits
|
|
// affected by a change to ID.
|
|
//
|
|
// SE_APP invalidates everything, anything invalidates SE_APP
|
|
// SE_MARK (am/pm) invalidate SE_HOUR, SE_HOUR invalides SE_MARK
|
|
//
|
|
void SECInvalidate(LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec, int id)
|
|
{
|
|
BOOL fAdjustDayMax = (id == SE_MONTH || id == SE_MONTHALT || id == SE_YEAR || id == SE_YEARALT || id == SE_APP || id == SE_ERA);
|
|
LPSUBEDIT pse;
|
|
int i;
|
|
|
|
// If we changed any date field and we are in a era-like calendar,
|
|
// then invalidate all, since changing the month, day or year may
|
|
// change the era or vice versa.
|
|
if (ISERACALENDAR(&psec->ct) && SE_DATELIKE(id))
|
|
{
|
|
id = SE_APP;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
for (pse=psec->pse, i=0 ; i < psec->cse ; pse++, i++)
|
|
{
|
|
// we need to invalidate all fields that changed
|
|
if (id == pse->id || pse->id == SE_APP || id == SE_APP || (id == SE_MARK && pse->id == SE_HOUR) || (id == SE_HOUR && pse->id == SE_MARK))
|
|
{
|
|
InvalidateScrollRect(psec->pci->hwnd, &pse->rc, psec->xScroll);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// the month or year changed, fix max field for SE_DAY
|
|
if (fAdjustDayMax && pse->id == SE_DAY)
|
|
{
|
|
pse->max = GetDaysForMonth(psec->st.wYear, psec->st.wMonth);
|
|
if (*pse->pval > pse->max)
|
|
{
|
|
*pse->pval = (WORD) pse->max;
|
|
}
|
|
SECInvalidate(psec, SE_DAY);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
__inline
|
|
BOOL
|
|
SECGetEraName(LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec, LPSUBEDIT pse, UINT uYear, LPTSTR ptszBuf, UINT cchBuf)
|
|
{
|
|
return MCGetDateFormatWithTempYear(&psec->ct, &psec->st, pse->pv, uYear, ptszBuf, cchBuf);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// SECIncrementEra increments/decrements the era field. ERAs are strange
|
|
// since they aren't a field unto themselves but are rather an artifact
|
|
// of the other fields. Returns the new year to use.
|
|
//
|
|
UINT SECIncrementEra(LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec, LPSUBEDIT pse, int delta)
|
|
{
|
|
TCHAR rgch[64];
|
|
TCHAR rgch2[64];
|
|
int i;
|
|
int cEras = DPA_GetPtrCount(psec->ct.hdpaEras);
|
|
|
|
UINT uNewYear;
|
|
|
|
ASSERT(pse->pval == &psec->st.wYear);
|
|
uNewYear = psec->st.wYear;
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// First find the era that encloses the current year.
|
|
// Do this by comparing the era string, because it's possible
|
|
// for the era to change twice within the same calendar year
|
|
// (if an emperor ascends to the throne and then dies the next week)
|
|
// so comparing against hdpaYear won't help.
|
|
//
|
|
SECGetEraName(psec, pse, uNewYear, rgch, ARRAYSIZE(rgch));
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// If the era string is blank, it means we're in the "before the
|
|
// first era" scenario, so we use the "virtual" last element that
|
|
// represents "minus infinity".
|
|
//
|
|
if (rgch[0] == TEXT('\0'))
|
|
{
|
|
i = cEras;
|
|
goto FoundEra;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; i < cEras; i++)
|
|
{
|
|
if (lstrcmp(rgch, DPA_FastGetPtr(psec->ct.hdpaEras, i)) == 0)
|
|
goto FoundEra;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Eek! Couldn't find the era! Just increment/decrement the
|
|
// year instead.
|
|
//
|
|
uNewYear += delta;
|
|
goto Finish;
|
|
|
|
FoundEra:
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// The era list is stored backwards, so incrementing the era means
|
|
// decrementing the index (i).
|
|
//
|
|
|
|
if (delta > 0) // Incrementing
|
|
{
|
|
//
|
|
// Don't go off the end of the list. Note that if we were in
|
|
// the "virtual era" at minus infinity, this decrement will move
|
|
// us into the first "real" era.
|
|
//
|
|
if (--i < 0)
|
|
goto Finish;
|
|
|
|
// Increment to first year of the next era.
|
|
uNewYear = StrToInt(DPA_FastGetPtr(psec->ct.hdpaYears, i));
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
//
|
|
// Don't go off the end of the list. Note that this also
|
|
// catches the "virtual era" at minus infinity.
|
|
//
|
|
if (i >= cEras)
|
|
goto Finish;
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Move to the last year of the previous era. Do this by
|
|
// starting with the first year of the current era and
|
|
// decrementing it if necessary.
|
|
//
|
|
uNewYear = StrToInt(DPA_FastGetPtr(psec->ct.hdpaYears, i));
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// We have a year that might be in the next/prev era. Try it.
|
|
// If we're still in the original era, then inc/dec one more time
|
|
// to get there for good.
|
|
//
|
|
SECGetEraName(psec, pse, uNewYear, rgch2, ARRAYSIZE(rgch2));
|
|
if (lstrcmp(rgch, rgch2) == 0)
|
|
uNewYear += delta;
|
|
|
|
Finish:
|
|
if (uNewYear < pse->min)
|
|
uNewYear = pse->min;
|
|
if (uNewYear > pse->max)
|
|
uNewYear = pse->max;
|
|
return uNewYear;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// SECIncrementSubedit increments currently selected subedit by delta
|
|
// Returns TRUE iff the value changed
|
|
BOOL SECIncrementSubedit(LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec, int delta)
|
|
{
|
|
LPSUBEDIT psubed;
|
|
UINT val;
|
|
|
|
if (psec->iseCur < 0)
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
|
|
psubed = &psec->pse[psec->iseCur];
|
|
|
|
if (psubed->id == SE_APP)
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Only numeric fields should accelerate. Text fields should always
|
|
// increment/decrement by exactly one position.
|
|
//
|
|
if (psubed->flDrawText & DT_CENTER) {
|
|
if (delta < 0) delta = -1;
|
|
if (delta > 0) delta = +1;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Incrementing/decrementing ERAs is strange.
|
|
//
|
|
if (psubed->id == SE_ERA)
|
|
{
|
|
val = SECIncrementEra(psec, psubed, delta);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
// delta isn't a REAL delta -- it's a directional thing. Here's the REAL delta:
|
|
if (psubed->cIncrement > 0)
|
|
delta = delta * psubed->cIncrement;
|
|
if(!psubed->pval)
|
|
return (FALSE);
|
|
|
|
val = *psubed->pval + delta;
|
|
while (1) {
|
|
if ((int)val < (int)psubed->min)
|
|
{
|
|
// don't wrap years
|
|
if (SE_YEARLIKE(psubed->id)) {
|
|
val = psubed->min;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
val = psubed->min - val - 1;
|
|
val = psubed->max - val;
|
|
}
|
|
else if (val > psubed->max)
|
|
{
|
|
// don't wrap years
|
|
if (SE_YEARLIKE(psubed->id)) {
|
|
val = psubed->max;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
val = val - psubed->max - 1;
|
|
val = psubed->min + val;
|
|
} else
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (*psubed->pval != val)
|
|
{
|
|
*psubed->pval = (WORD) val;
|
|
|
|
SECInvalidate(psec, psubed->id);
|
|
return(TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// returns TRUE if a value has changed, FALSE otherwise
|
|
BOOL SECHandleKeydown(DATEPICK *pdp, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
|
|
{
|
|
int delta = 1;
|
|
LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec = &pdp->sec;
|
|
|
|
switch (wParam)
|
|
{
|
|
case VK_LEFT:
|
|
delta = -1;
|
|
// fall through...
|
|
case VK_RIGHT:
|
|
SECResetSubeditEdit(pdp);
|
|
SECIncrFocus(pdp, delta);
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (psec->iseCur >= 0 &&
|
|
psec->pse[psec->iseCur].id == SE_APP)
|
|
{
|
|
NMDATETIMEWMKEYDOWN nmdtkd = {0};
|
|
|
|
nmdtkd.nVirtKey = (int) wParam;
|
|
nmdtkd.pszFormat = psec->pse[psec->iseCur].pv;
|
|
SECGetSystemtime(psec,&nmdtkd.st);
|
|
|
|
CCSendNotify(psec->pci, DTN_WMKEYDOWN, &nmdtkd.nmhdr);
|
|
|
|
if (psec->st.wYear != nmdtkd.st.wYear ||
|
|
psec->st.wMonth != nmdtkd.st.wMonth ||
|
|
psec->st.wDay != nmdtkd.st.wDay ||
|
|
psec->st.wHour != nmdtkd.st.wHour ||
|
|
psec->st.wMinute != nmdtkd.st.wMinute ||
|
|
psec->st.wSecond != nmdtkd.st.wSecond) // skip wDayOfWeek and wMilliseconds
|
|
{
|
|
psec->st = nmdtkd.st;
|
|
SECInvalidate(psec, SE_APP);
|
|
return(TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
MSG msg;
|
|
switch (wParam)
|
|
{
|
|
case VK_DOWN:
|
|
case VK_SUBTRACT:
|
|
delta = -1;
|
|
// fall through...
|
|
case VK_UP:
|
|
case VK_ADD:
|
|
PeekMessage(&msg, NULL, WM_CHAR, WM_CHAR, PM_REMOVE); // eat this message
|
|
SECResetSubeditEdit(pdp);
|
|
return(SECIncrementSubedit(psec, delta));
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case VK_HOME:
|
|
case VK_END:
|
|
if (psec->iseCur >= 0)
|
|
{
|
|
LPSUBEDIT psubed;
|
|
int valT;
|
|
|
|
SECResetSubeditEdit(pdp);
|
|
|
|
psubed = &psec->pse[psec->iseCur];
|
|
valT = *psubed->pval;
|
|
*psubed->pval = (wParam == VK_HOME ? psubed->min : psubed->max);
|
|
delta = *psubed->pval - valT;
|
|
if (delta != 0)
|
|
{
|
|
SECInvalidate(psec, psubed->id);
|
|
return(TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// returns TRUE if a value has changed, FALSE otherwise
|
|
// This function performs a DPNotifyDateChange() if applicable.
|
|
BOOL SECHandleChar(DATEPICK *pdp, TCHAR ch)
|
|
{
|
|
LPSUBEDIT psubed;
|
|
UINT uCurDigit; // current digit hit
|
|
UINT uCurSubValue; // current displayed subvalue in edit field
|
|
UINT uCurValue; // current value of the subedit
|
|
LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec = &pdp->sec;
|
|
|
|
// NOTE: In almost all cases, uCurSubValue will be the same as uCurValue
|
|
// since most fields don't have shortened displays. However, for years
|
|
// we can display two digits of a 4 digit number, which makes for
|
|
// complications.
|
|
|
|
if (psec->iseCur < 0)
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
|
|
psubed = &psec->pse[psec->iseCur];
|
|
|
|
if (psubed->cchMax == 0)
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
|
|
if (ch == psec->cDelimeter || StrChr(psec->szDelimeters, ch))
|
|
{
|
|
SECResetSubeditEdit(pdp);
|
|
SECIncrFocus(pdp, 1);
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// allow 'a' and 'p' to set the AM/PM fields. we need to do some
|
|
// funky stuff to get this to work right, so here it is.
|
|
else if (psubed->id == SE_MARK)
|
|
{
|
|
if ((ch == TEXT('p') || ch == TEXT('P')) && (*psubed->pval < 12))
|
|
{
|
|
int valNew = *psubed->pval+12;
|
|
|
|
ch = (valNew) % 10 + TEXT('0');
|
|
psubed->valEdit = (valNew) / 10;
|
|
psubed->cchEdit = 1;
|
|
}
|
|
else if ((ch == TEXT('a') || ch == TEXT('A')) && (*psubed->pval >= 12))
|
|
{
|
|
int valNew = *psubed->pval-12;
|
|
ch = (valNew) % 10 + TEXT('0');
|
|
psubed->valEdit = (valNew) / 10;
|
|
psubed->cchEdit = 1;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else if (ch < TEXT('0') || ch > TEXT('9'))
|
|
{
|
|
MessageBeep(MB_ICONHAND);
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (psubed->id == SE_ERA)
|
|
{
|
|
// I don't know what to do with this field, so bail out
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
uCurDigit = ch - TEXT('0');
|
|
if (psubed->cchEdit)
|
|
uCurSubValue = psubed->valEdit * 10 + uCurDigit;
|
|
else
|
|
uCurSubValue = uCurDigit;
|
|
|
|
uCurValue = SECAdjustByType(pdp, psubed, uCurSubValue);
|
|
|
|
// Allow bogus values for years since you might need to type
|
|
// in a bogus value on the way to a valid four-digit value.
|
|
|
|
if (uCurValue > psubed->max && !SE_YEARLIKE(psubed->id))
|
|
{
|
|
// the number has exceeded the max, so no point in continuing
|
|
psubed->cchEdit = 0;
|
|
|
|
// If we're going to exceed the max, then reset the edit
|
|
// and make this the first number instead of beeping
|
|
|
|
uCurValue = uCurValue - uCurSubValue + uCurDigit;
|
|
uCurSubValue = uCurDigit;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Allow 0 to be valEdit for subedits, even though it may be
|
|
// illegal for that field (e.g., month).
|
|
// This lets people type "09" and get the "expected" result.
|
|
|
|
SECInvalidate(psec, psubed->id);
|
|
|
|
psubed->valEdit = uCurSubValue;
|
|
psubed->cchEdit++;
|
|
if (psubed->cchEdit == psubed->cchMax)
|
|
psubed->cchEdit = 0;
|
|
|
|
if (psubed->cchEdit == 0)
|
|
{
|
|
// SECSetSubeditValue will do the validation
|
|
SECSetSubeditValue(pdp, psubed, uCurSubValue, TRUE);
|
|
return(TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if(psubed->valEdit != *psubed->pval)
|
|
InvalidateRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// SECFormatSubed returns pointer to correct string
|
|
LPTSTR SECFormatSubed(LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec, LPSUBEDIT psubed, LPTSTR szTmp, UINT cch)
|
|
{
|
|
LPTSTR sz;
|
|
|
|
if (psubed->id == SE_STATIC)
|
|
{
|
|
sz = (LPTSTR)psubed->pv;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
sz = szTmp;
|
|
SEGetTimeDateFormat(psubed, psec, szTmp, cch);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return sz;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Returns TRUE if this subedit displays as digits (rather than text).
|
|
|
|
BOOL SECIsNumeric(LPSUBEDIT psubed)
|
|
{
|
|
switch (psubed->id)
|
|
{
|
|
case SE_ERA: return FALSE; // g never
|
|
case SE_YEAR: return TRUE; // yyyy always digits
|
|
case SE_YEARALT: return TRUE; // yy always digits
|
|
case SE_MONTH: return lstrlen(psubed->pv) <= 2; // MM yes, but not MMM
|
|
case SE_MONTHALT: return lstrlen(psubed->pv) <= 4; // ddMM yes, but not ddMMM
|
|
case SE_DAY: return TRUE; // dd always digits
|
|
case SE_MARK: return FALSE; // tt never
|
|
case SE_HOUR: return TRUE; // hh always digits
|
|
case SE_MINUTE: return TRUE; // mm always digits
|
|
case SE_SECOND: return TRUE; // ss always digits
|
|
case SE_STATIC: return FALSE; // static text
|
|
case SE_APP: return FALSE; // app's job to format this
|
|
}
|
|
return FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// SECDrawSubedits draws subedits and updates their bounding rectangles
|
|
void SECDrawSubedits(HDC hdc, LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec, BOOL fFocus, BOOL fEnabled)
|
|
{
|
|
HGDIOBJ hfontOrig;
|
|
int i, iseCur;
|
|
LPTSTR sz;
|
|
TCHAR szTmp[DTP_FORMATLENGTH];
|
|
LPSUBEDIT psubed;
|
|
|
|
hfontOrig = SelectObject(hdc, (HGDIOBJ)psec->hfont);
|
|
|
|
// Do this cuz the xScroll stuff can send text into visible area that it shouldn't be in
|
|
IntersectClipRect(hdc, psec->rc.left, psec->rc.top, psec->rc.right, psec->rc.bottom);
|
|
|
|
SetBkColor(hdc, g_clrHighlight);
|
|
|
|
iseCur = psec->iseCur;
|
|
if (!fFocus)
|
|
iseCur = SUBEDIT_NONE;
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0, psubed = psec->pse; i < psec->cse; i++, psubed++)
|
|
{
|
|
RECT rc = psubed->rc;
|
|
if (psec->xScroll)
|
|
OffsetRect(&rc, -psec->xScroll, 0);
|
|
|
|
if (!fEnabled)
|
|
{
|
|
SetBkMode(hdc, TRANSPARENT);
|
|
SetTextColor(hdc, g_clrGrayText);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (iseCur == i)
|
|
{
|
|
SetBkMode(hdc, OPAQUE);
|
|
SetTextColor(hdc, g_clrHighlightText);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
SetBkMode(hdc, TRANSPARENT);
|
|
SetTextColor(hdc, g_clrWindowText);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//HACK
|
|
//if subedit control is being edited then we display the
|
|
//value in psubed->valEdit because it is not being updated
|
|
//until psubed->cchMax is reached or SECSave/ResetSubeditEdit is
|
|
//called
|
|
if(i == psec->iseCur && psubed->cchEdit != 0)
|
|
{
|
|
//
|
|
// If the field is numeric, then display it raw including the
|
|
// leading zero. People really want to see that leading zero,
|
|
// so give the public what it wants. (And even if they didn't,
|
|
// we need this special case anyway because the value might not
|
|
// yet be a valid value because the user is still typing it.
|
|
// This is particular true for SE_YEARLIKE fields.)
|
|
//
|
|
if (SECIsNumeric(psubed))
|
|
{
|
|
TCHAR szFormat[10];
|
|
wsprintf(szFormat, TEXT("%%0%dd"), psubed->cchEdit);
|
|
wsprintf(szTmp, szFormat, psubed->valEdit);
|
|
sz = szTmp;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
// The day-of-month might not be valid for the temporary month
|
|
// or year in psubed->valEdit, so force the day-of-month to 1
|
|
// so the month will always come out okay.
|
|
//
|
|
// This is tricky, because if the item being edited is the
|
|
// day-of-month itself, we want to display valEdit, not 1!
|
|
// So we force it to 1, then slam in the valEdit, then do
|
|
// our SECFormatSubed, then restore the original values.
|
|
//
|
|
UINT uTmp = *psubed->pval; //save the original value
|
|
WORD wOldDay = psec->st.wDay;
|
|
psec->st.wDay = 1;
|
|
// Don't change to zero in case user is typing a leading zero
|
|
// into an alphabetic field. (Stranger things have happened.)
|
|
if (psubed->valEdit)
|
|
*psubed->pval = (WORD) psubed->valEdit;
|
|
sz = SECFormatSubed(psec, psubed, szTmp, ARRAYSIZE(szTmp));
|
|
psec->st.wDay = wOldDay;
|
|
*psubed->pval = (WORD) uTmp; //restore the original value
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
sz = SECFormatSubed(psec, psubed, szTmp, ARRAYSIZE(szTmp));
|
|
|
|
DrawText(hdc, sz, -1, &rc,
|
|
psubed->flDrawText | DT_TOP | DT_NOPREFIX | DT_SINGLELINE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// we know no clip region was selected before this function
|
|
SelectClipRgn(hdc, NULL);
|
|
|
|
SelectObject(hdc, hfontOrig);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// DON'T need to worry about xScroll here because pt is offset
|
|
int SECSubeditFromPt(LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec, POINT pt)
|
|
{
|
|
int isubed;
|
|
|
|
for (isubed = psec->cse - 1; isubed >= 0; isubed--)
|
|
{
|
|
if (!psec->pse[isubed].fReadOnly &&
|
|
pt.x >= psec->pse[isubed].rc.left)
|
|
{
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return(isubed);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void SECGetSystemtime(LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec, LPSYSTEMTIME pst)
|
|
{
|
|
*pst = psec->st;
|
|
|
|
// we don't keep doy up to date, set it now (0==sun, 6==sat)
|
|
pst->wDayOfWeek = (DowFromDate(pst)+1) % 7; // this returns 0==sun
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
BOOL SECSetSystemtime(DATEPICK *pdp, LPSYSTEMTIME pst)
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->sec.st = *pst;
|
|
|
|
return TRUE; // assume something changed
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// SECEdit: Start a free-format edit return result in szOutput.
|
|
BOOL SECEdit(DATEPICK *pdp, LPTSTR szOutput, int cchOutput)
|
|
{
|
|
HWND hwndEdit;
|
|
TCHAR szBuf[DTP_FORMATLENGTH];
|
|
LPTSTR pszBuf;
|
|
int cchBuf;
|
|
int i;
|
|
int isePrev;
|
|
LPSUBEDIT pse;
|
|
BOOL fRet = FALSE;
|
|
LPSUBEDITCONTROL psec = &pdp->sec;
|
|
|
|
// Build the string that we hand to the app.
|
|
// For the duration of the string build, set the current subedit
|
|
// to SUBEDIT_ALL so that
|
|
// 1. partial edits are applied before building the string, and
|
|
// 2. SE_YEARALT can format appropriately.
|
|
|
|
isePrev = psec->iseCur;
|
|
SECSetCurSubed(pdp, SUBEDIT_ALL);
|
|
pszBuf = szBuf;
|
|
cchBuf = ARRAYSIZE(szBuf);
|
|
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Need to mirror the format since the Edit control will take
|
|
// of the origianl format with RTL mirroring.
|
|
//
|
|
if (psec->fMirrorSEC)
|
|
pse = (psec->pse + (psec->cse - 1));
|
|
else
|
|
pse = psec->pse;
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0 ; i < psec->cse ; i++)
|
|
{
|
|
int nTmp;
|
|
|
|
if (pse->id == SE_STATIC)
|
|
{
|
|
lstrcpyn(pszBuf, pse->pv, cchBuf);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
SEGetTimeDateFormat(pse, psec, pszBuf, cchBuf);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nTmp = lstrlen(pszBuf);
|
|
|
|
cchBuf -= nTmp;
|
|
pszBuf += nTmp;
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// If this control is mirrored, then read contents backward.
|
|
//
|
|
if (psec->fMirrorSEC)
|
|
pse--;
|
|
else
|
|
pse++;
|
|
}
|
|
SECSetCurSubed(pdp, isePrev);
|
|
|
|
hwndEdit = CreateWindowEx(0, TEXT("EDIT"), szBuf, WS_CHILD | ES_AUTOHSCROLL,
|
|
psec->rc.left + 2, psec->rc.top + 2,
|
|
psec->rc.right - psec->rc.left,
|
|
psec->rc.bottom - psec->rc.top,
|
|
psec->pci->hwnd, NULL, HINST_THISDLL, NULL);
|
|
|
|
if (hwndEdit)
|
|
{
|
|
RECT rcEdit = psec->rc;
|
|
|
|
MapWindowRect(psec->pci->hwnd, NULL, &rcEdit); // ClientToScreen
|
|
pdp->fFreeEditing = TRUE;
|
|
InvalidateRect(psec->pci->hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
|
|
Edit_LimitText(hwndEdit, ARRAYSIZE(szBuf) - 1);
|
|
FORWARD_WM_SETFONT(hwndEdit, psec->hfont, FALSE, SendMessage);
|
|
SetFocus(hwndEdit);
|
|
RescrollEditWindow(hwndEdit);
|
|
ShowWindow(hwndEdit, SW_SHOWNORMAL);
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// The basic idea:
|
|
//
|
|
// Process messages until we receive a cancel message,
|
|
// or an accept message, or some implicit accept-like
|
|
// thing happens (namely, a sent WM_KILLFOCUS).
|
|
//
|
|
// If the accept or cancel was implicit, then leave the
|
|
// cancelling message in the queue for somebody else
|
|
// to process. Otherwise, if the accept/cancel was
|
|
// explicit, eat the message so nobody else gets
|
|
// confused by it.
|
|
//
|
|
for (;;)
|
|
{
|
|
MSG msg;
|
|
BOOL fPeek;
|
|
|
|
fPeek = PeekMessage(&msg, NULL, 0, 0, PM_NOREMOVE);
|
|
|
|
// That PeekMessage may have dispatched a sent WM_KILLFOCUS,
|
|
// in which case the change is considered to have been Accepted.
|
|
// Leave the message we peeked in the queue because the accept
|
|
// was implicit.
|
|
if (GetFocus() != hwndEdit)
|
|
{
|
|
DebugMsg(TF_MONTHCAL, TEXT("SECEdit accept (killfocus)"));
|
|
fRet = TRUE;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (fPeek) {
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Messages that cause us to cancel implicitly.
|
|
// These messages stay in the queue.
|
|
//
|
|
|
|
if (msg.message == WM_SYSCOMMAND ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_SYSCHAR ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_SYSDEADCHAR ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_DEADCHAR ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_SYSKEYDOWN ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_QUIT) {
|
|
DebugMsg(TF_MONTHCAL, TEXT("SECEdit got a message to terminate (%d)"), msg.message);
|
|
fRet = FALSE;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Messages that cause us to accept implicitly.
|
|
// These messages stay in the queue.
|
|
//
|
|
if ((msg.message == WM_LBUTTONDOWN ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_NCLBUTTONDOWN ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_RBUTTONDOWN ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_NCRBUTTONDOWN ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK) &&
|
|
!PtInRect(&rcEdit, msg.pt))
|
|
{
|
|
DebugMsg(TF_MONTHCAL, TEXT("SECEdit got a message to accept (%d)"), msg.message);
|
|
fRet = TRUE;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
// We are now committed to eating or processing the message
|
|
|
|
GetMessage(&msg, NULL, 0, 0);
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Messages that cause us to cancel explicitly.
|
|
//
|
|
if (msg.message == WM_KEYDOWN && msg.wParam == VK_ESCAPE)
|
|
{
|
|
DebugMsg(TF_MONTHCAL, TEXT("SECEdit explicit cancel (%d)"), msg.message);
|
|
fRet = FALSE;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Messages that cause us to accept explicitly.
|
|
//
|
|
if (msg.message == WM_KEYDOWN && msg.wParam == VK_RETURN)
|
|
{
|
|
DebugMsg(TF_MONTHCAL, TEXT("SECEdit explicit accept (%d)"), msg.message);
|
|
fRet = TRUE;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// All other messages just get dispatched.
|
|
//
|
|
TranslateMessage(&msg);
|
|
DispatchMessage(&msg);
|
|
} else {
|
|
WaitMessage();
|
|
}
|
|
} // for (;;)
|
|
|
|
if (fRet)
|
|
{
|
|
Edit_GetText(hwndEdit, szOutput, cchOutput);
|
|
}
|
|
DestroyWindow(hwndEdit);
|
|
pdp->fFreeEditing = FALSE;
|
|
InvalidateRect(psec->pci->hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return(fRet);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// returns true if months were scrolled, false otherwise
|
|
//
|
|
BOOL FScrollIntoView(MONTHCAL *pmc)
|
|
{
|
|
int nDelta = 0;
|
|
SYSTEMTIME stEnd;
|
|
|
|
if (MonthCal_IsMultiSelect(pmc))
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->stEndSel, stEnd);
|
|
else
|
|
CopyDate(pmc->st, stEnd);
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// If the month/yr for the new date is not in view, bring it
|
|
// into view
|
|
//
|
|
if ((stEnd.wYear < pmc->stMonthFirst.wYear) ||
|
|
((stEnd.wYear == pmc->stMonthFirst.wYear) && (stEnd.wMonth < pmc->stMonthFirst.wMonth)))
|
|
{
|
|
nDelta = - (pmc->stMonthFirst.wYear - (int)stEnd.wYear) * 12 - (pmc->stMonthFirst.wMonth - (int)stEnd.wMonth);
|
|
}
|
|
else if ((pmc->st.wYear > pmc->stMonthLast.wYear) ||
|
|
((pmc->st.wYear == pmc->stMonthLast.wYear) && (pmc->st.wMonth > pmc->stMonthLast.wMonth)))
|
|
{
|
|
nDelta = ((int)pmc->st.wYear - pmc->stMonthLast.wYear) * 12 + ((int)pmc->st.wMonth - pmc->stMonthLast.wMonth);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (nDelta)
|
|
return FIncrStartMonth(pmc, nDelta, TRUE /* dont change day */);
|
|
else
|
|
return FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// Validates the isubed to make sure we aren't setting it to something
|
|
// bogus. If necessary, we pick a field at random.
|
|
//
|
|
void SECSafeSetCurSubed(DATEPICK *pdp, int ise)
|
|
{
|
|
if (ise >= pdp->sec.cse ||
|
|
(ise >= 0 && pdp->sec.pse[ise].fReadOnly))
|
|
{
|
|
SECSetCurSubed(pdp, SUBEDIT_NONE);
|
|
SECIncrFocus(pdp, 1);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
SECSetCurSubed(pdp, ise);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LRESULT DTM_OnSetFormat(DATEPICK *pdp, LPCTSTR szFormat)
|
|
{
|
|
|
|
// remember the field that has focus so we can restore it later
|
|
//
|
|
int iseCur = pdp->sec.iseCur;
|
|
|
|
if (!szFormat || !*szFormat)
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->fLocale = TRUE;
|
|
DPHandleLocaleChange(pdp);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->fLocale = FALSE;
|
|
SECParseFormat(pdp, &pdp->sec, szFormat);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// restore focus. it might be cool to do extra validation
|
|
// to see if iseCur is the same type that it used to be,
|
|
// maybe even validating that cse is constant. the case we're
|
|
// really trying to fix is changing "1st" to "2nd" to "3rd",
|
|
// so only a text portion is really changing...
|
|
//
|
|
SECSafeSetCurSubed(pdp, iseCur);
|
|
|
|
return((LRESULT)TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// DATEPICKER stuff
|
|
//
|
|
|
|
LRESULT CALLBACK DatePickWndProc(HWND hwnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
|
|
{
|
|
DATEPICK *pdp;
|
|
NMHDR nmhdr;
|
|
LRESULT lres = 0;
|
|
|
|
if (message == WM_NCCREATE)
|
|
return(DPNcCreateHandler(hwnd));
|
|
|
|
pdp = DatePick_GetPtr(hwnd);
|
|
if (pdp == NULL)
|
|
return(DefWindowProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam));
|
|
|
|
// Dispatch the various messages we can receive
|
|
switch (message)
|
|
{
|
|
case WM_CREATE:
|
|
CCCreateWindow();
|
|
lres = DPCreateHandler(pdp, hwnd, (LPCREATESTRUCT)lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_ERASEBKGND:
|
|
if (!pdp->fEnabled) {
|
|
RECT rc;
|
|
HDC hdc = (HDC)wParam;
|
|
|
|
GetClipBox(hdc, &rc);
|
|
FillRectClr(hdc, &rc, g_clrBtnFace);
|
|
|
|
} else
|
|
goto DoDefault;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_PRINTCLIENT:
|
|
case WM_PAINT:
|
|
|
|
{
|
|
PAINTSTRUCT ps;
|
|
HDC hdc;
|
|
|
|
hdc = (HDC)wParam;
|
|
|
|
if (hdc) {
|
|
DPPaint(pdp, hdc);
|
|
} else {
|
|
|
|
hwnd = pdp->ci.hwnd;
|
|
hdc = BeginPaint(hwnd, &ps);
|
|
DPPaint(pdp, hdc);
|
|
EndPaint(hwnd, &ps);
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
case WM_LBUTTONDOWN:
|
|
DPLButtonDown(pdp, wParam, lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_NOTIFY:
|
|
switch (((LPNMHDR)lParam)->code)
|
|
{
|
|
case MCN_SELCHANGE:
|
|
case MCN_SELECT:
|
|
{
|
|
LPNMSELECT pnms = (LPNMSELECT)lParam;
|
|
|
|
DebugMsg(TF_MONTHCAL,TEXT("MonthCal notified DateTimePick of SELECT"));
|
|
if (!DPSetDate(pdp, &pnms->stSelStart, TRUE))
|
|
{
|
|
DebugMsg(DM_WARNING,TEXT("MonthCal cannot set selected date!"));
|
|
MessageBeep(MB_ICONHAND);
|
|
}
|
|
pdp->fShow = (((LPNMHDR)lParam)->code == MCN_SELCHANGE);
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
case UDN_DELTAPOS:
|
|
if ((int)wParam == DATEPICK_UPDOWN)
|
|
{
|
|
LPNM_UPDOWN pnmdp = (LPNM_UPDOWN)lParam;
|
|
|
|
if (!pdp->fFocus)
|
|
SetFocus(pdp->ci.hwnd);
|
|
|
|
SECResetSubeditEdit(pdp);
|
|
|
|
if (SECIncrementSubedit(&pdp->sec, -pnmdp->iDelta))
|
|
DPNotifyDateChange(pdp);
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
} // WM_NOTIFY switch
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_GETFONT:
|
|
lres = (LRESULT)pdp->sec.hfont;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_SETFONT:
|
|
DPHandleSetFont(pdp, (HFONT)wParam, (BOOL)LOWORD(lParam));
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_DESTROY:
|
|
CCDestroyWindow();
|
|
DPDestroyHandler(hwnd, pdp, wParam, lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_KILLFOCUS:
|
|
case WM_SETFOCUS:
|
|
{
|
|
BOOL fGotFocus = (message == WM_SETFOCUS);
|
|
if (BOOLIFY(fGotFocus) != BOOLIFY(pdp->fFocus))
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->fFocus = (WORD) fGotFocus;
|
|
if (pdp->sec.iseCur >= 0)
|
|
{
|
|
InvalidateScrollRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, &pdp->sec.pse[pdp->sec.iseCur].rc, pdp->sec.xScroll);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (DatePick_ShowCheck(pdp))
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->fCheckFocus = (WORD) fGotFocus;
|
|
InvalidateRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, &pdp->rcCheck, TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (fGotFocus) // nothing has focus, bring it to something
|
|
{
|
|
SECIncrFocus(pdp, 1);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
CCSendNotify(&pdp->ci, (fGotFocus ? NM_SETFOCUS : NM_KILLFOCUS), &nmhdr);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (fGotFocus)
|
|
{
|
|
// Revalidate iseLastActive because the app might've changed
|
|
// the format while we were nonfocus
|
|
SECSafeSetCurSubed(pdp, pdp->iseLastActive);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->iseLastActive = pdp->sec.iseCur;
|
|
SECSetCurSubed(pdp, SUBEDIT_NONE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
case WM_ENABLE:
|
|
{
|
|
BOOL fEnabled = wParam ? TRUE:FALSE;
|
|
if (BOOLIFY(pdp->fEnabled) != fEnabled)
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->fEnabled = (WORD) fEnabled;
|
|
if (pdp->hwndUD)
|
|
EnableWindow(pdp->hwndUD, fEnabled);
|
|
InvalidateRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
case DTMP_WINDOWPOSCHANGED:
|
|
case WM_SIZE:
|
|
{
|
|
RECT rc;
|
|
|
|
if (message == DTMP_WINDOWPOSCHANGED)
|
|
{
|
|
GetClientRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, &rc);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
rc.left = 0;
|
|
rc.top = 0;
|
|
rc.right = GET_X_LPARAM(lParam);
|
|
rc.bottom = GET_Y_LPARAM(lParam);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
DPRecomputeSizing(pdp, &rc);
|
|
|
|
InvalidateRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
UpdateWindow(pdp->ci.hwnd);
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
case WM_GETDLGCODE:
|
|
lres = DLGC_WANTARROWS | DLGC_WANTCHARS;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_KEYDOWN:
|
|
if (pdp->fShow)
|
|
{
|
|
SendMessage(pdp->hwndMC, WM_KEYDOWN, wParam, lParam);
|
|
return 0;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
lres = DPHandleKeydown(pdp, wParam, lParam);
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_KEYUP:
|
|
if (pdp->fShow)
|
|
SendMessage(pdp->hwndMC, WM_KEYUP, wParam, lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_SYSKEYDOWN:
|
|
if (wParam == VK_DOWN && !pdp->fUseUpDown)
|
|
{
|
|
DPLBD_MonthCal(pdp, FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
goto DoDefault;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_CHAR:
|
|
lres = DPHandleChar(pdp, wParam, lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_SYSCOLORCHANGE:
|
|
InitGlobalColors();
|
|
// Don't need to propagate to pdp->hwndMC because it is its own
|
|
// top-level window.
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_WININICHANGE:
|
|
if (lParam == 0 ||
|
|
#ifdef UNICODE_WIN9x
|
|
!lstrcmpiA((LPSTR)lParam, "Intl")
|
|
#else
|
|
!lstrcmpi((LPTSTR)lParam, TEXT("Intl"))
|
|
#endif
|
|
)
|
|
{
|
|
DPHandleLocaleChange(pdp);
|
|
}
|
|
// Don't need to propagate to pdp->hwndMC because it is its own
|
|
// top-level window.
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_NOTIFYFORMAT:
|
|
return CIHandleNotifyFormat(&pdp->ci, lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
// Cannot use WM_SETTEXT to change the text of a DTP
|
|
case WM_SETTEXT:
|
|
return -1;
|
|
|
|
case WM_GETTEXT:
|
|
if (!lParam || !wParam) {
|
|
// previously this just failed and returned 0
|
|
// in bogus input. should be safe to convert to
|
|
// gettextlength
|
|
message = WM_GETTEXTLENGTH;
|
|
} else
|
|
(*(LPTSTR)lParam) = 0;
|
|
|
|
// fall through
|
|
|
|
case WM_GETTEXTLENGTH:
|
|
{
|
|
TCHAR szTmp[DTP_FORMATLENGTH];
|
|
LPSUBEDIT psubed;
|
|
int i;
|
|
#ifdef UNICODE_WIN9x
|
|
char *pszText = (char *)lParam;
|
|
#else
|
|
TCHAR *pszText = (TCHAR *)lParam;
|
|
#endif
|
|
UINT nTextLen = 0;
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0, psubed = pdp->sec.pse; i < pdp->sec.cse; i++, psubed++)
|
|
{
|
|
LPTSTR sz;
|
|
UINT nLen;
|
|
|
|
sz = SECFormatSubed(&pdp->sec, psubed, szTmp, ARRAYSIZE(szTmp));
|
|
nLen = lstrlen(sz);
|
|
|
|
if (message == WM_GETTEXT) {
|
|
if (nTextLen + nLen >= wParam)
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
#ifdef UNICODE_WIN9x
|
|
// safe to pass wparam because we calculated above that it was ok
|
|
ConvertWToAN(CP_ACP, pszText, wParam, sz, -1);
|
|
#else
|
|
lstrcpy(pszText, sz);
|
|
#endif
|
|
pszText += nLen;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nTextLen += nLen;
|
|
}
|
|
lres = nTextLen;
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_STYLECHANGING:
|
|
lres = DPOnStyleChanging(pdp, (UINT) wParam, (LPSTYLESTRUCT)lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_STYLECHANGED:
|
|
lres = DPOnStyleChanged(pdp, (UINT) wParam, (LPSTYLESTRUCT)lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case WM_CONTEXTMENU:
|
|
if (pdp->hwndMC)
|
|
lres = SendMessage(pdp->hwndMC, message, wParam, lParam);
|
|
else
|
|
goto DoDefault;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// DATETIMEPICK specific messages
|
|
//
|
|
|
|
// DTM_GETSYSTEMTIME wParam=void lParam=LPSYSTEMTIME
|
|
// returns GDT_NONE if no date selected (DTS_SHOWNONE only)
|
|
// returns GDT_VALID and modifies *lParam to be the selected date
|
|
case DTM_GETSYSTEMTIME:
|
|
if (!pdp->fCheck)
|
|
{
|
|
lres = GDT_NONE;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
// If there is an edit pending, save it so the app sees
|
|
// the absolute latest values. This is important for app
|
|
// compat, because IE4 wasn't Y2K compliant and people got
|
|
// away with typing just two digits of the year and hitting
|
|
// ENTER. The "Find Files" dialog would then ask us for the
|
|
// year, and in the Y2K case, we are still waiting for the
|
|
// other two digits (for a four-digit year) and return the
|
|
// wrong year.
|
|
SECSaveSubeditEdit(pdp);
|
|
SECGetSystemtime(&pdp->sec, (SYSTEMTIME *)lParam);
|
|
lres = GDT_VALID;
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
// DTM_SETSYSTEMTIME wParam=GDT_flag lParam=LPSYSTEMTIME
|
|
// if wParam==GDT_NONE, sets datepick to None (DTS_SHOWNONE only)
|
|
// if wParam==GDT_VALID, sets datepick to *lParam
|
|
// returns TRUE on success, FALSE on error (such as bad params)
|
|
case DTM_SETSYSTEMTIME:
|
|
{
|
|
LPSYSTEMTIME pst = ((LPSYSTEMTIME)lParam);
|
|
|
|
if ((wParam != GDT_NONE && wParam != GDT_VALID) ||
|
|
(wParam == GDT_NONE && !DatePick_ShowCheck(pdp)) ||
|
|
(wParam == GDT_VALID && !IsValidSystemtime(pst)))
|
|
{
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// reset subed in place edit
|
|
SECResetSubeditEdit(pdp);
|
|
|
|
pdp->fNoNotify = TRUE;
|
|
if (DatePick_ShowCheck(pdp))
|
|
{
|
|
if ((wParam == GDT_NONE) || (pdp->fCheck))
|
|
{
|
|
// let checkbox have focus
|
|
SECSetCurSubed(pdp, SUBEDIT_NONE);
|
|
pdp->fCheckFocus = 1;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
pdp->fCheck = (wParam == GDT_NONE ? 0 : 1);
|
|
InvalidateRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
if (wParam == GDT_VALID)
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->fNoNotify = TRUE;
|
|
DPSetDate(pdp, pst, FALSE);
|
|
pdp->fNoNotify = FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
lres = TRUE;
|
|
pdp->fNoNotify = FALSE;
|
|
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// DTM_GETRANGE wParam=void lParam=LPSYSTEMTIME[2]
|
|
// modifies *lParam to be the minimum ALLOWABLE systemtime (or 0 if no minimum)
|
|
// modifies *(lParam+1) to be the maximum ALLOWABLE systemtime (or 0 if no maximum)
|
|
// returns GDTR_MIN|GDTR_MAX if there is a minimum|maximum limit
|
|
case DTM_GETRANGE:
|
|
{
|
|
LPSYSTEMTIME pst = (LPSYSTEMTIME)lParam;
|
|
|
|
ZeroMemory(pst, 2 * sizeof(SYSTEMTIME));
|
|
lres = pdp->gdtr;
|
|
if (lres & GDTR_MIN)
|
|
pst[0] = pdp->stMin;
|
|
if (lres & GDTR_MAX)
|
|
pst[1] = pdp->stMax;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// DTM_SETRANGE wParam=GDR_flags lParam=LPSYSTEMTIME[2]
|
|
// if GDTR_MIN, sets the minimum ALLOWABLE systemtime to *lParam, otherwise removes minimum
|
|
// if GDTR_MAX, sets the maximum ALLOWABLE systemtime to *(lParam+1), otherwise removes maximum
|
|
// returns TRUE on success, FALSE on error (such as invalid parameters)
|
|
case DTM_SETRANGE:
|
|
{
|
|
LPSYSTEMTIME pst = (LPSYSTEMTIME)lParam;
|
|
const SYSTEMTIME *pstMin = (wParam & GDTR_MIN) ? pst+0 : &c_stEpoch;
|
|
const SYSTEMTIME *pstMax = (wParam & GDTR_MAX) ? pst+1 : &c_stArmageddon;
|
|
|
|
if (!IsValidDate(pstMin) || !IsValidDate(pstMax))
|
|
{
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Save the flags so we can tell the app if it asks.
|
|
// We personally don't care.
|
|
pdp->gdtr = (UINT)wParam & (GDTR_MIN | GDTR_MAX);
|
|
|
|
if (CmpDate(&pdp->stMin, &pdp->stMax) <= 0)
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->stMin = *pstMin;
|
|
pdp->stMax = *pstMax;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->stMin = *pstMax;
|
|
pdp->stMax = *pstMin;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// we might now have an invalid date, if so, try to set the current
|
|
// date and munge it to a max or min value if out of range.
|
|
pdp->fNoNotify = TRUE;
|
|
DPSetDate(pdp, &pdp->sec.st, TRUE);
|
|
pdp->fNoNotify = FALSE;
|
|
lres = TRUE;
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
#ifdef UNICODE
|
|
// DTM_SETFORMAT wParam=void lParam=LPCTSTR
|
|
// Sets the formatting string to a copy of lParam.
|
|
case DTM_SETFORMATA:
|
|
{
|
|
LPCSTR pszFormat = (LPCSTR)lParam;
|
|
LPWSTR pwszFormat = NULL;
|
|
|
|
if (pszFormat && *pszFormat)
|
|
{
|
|
pwszFormat = ProduceWFromA(pdp->ci.uiCodePage, pszFormat);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
lres = DTM_OnSetFormat(pdp, pwszFormat);
|
|
|
|
if (pwszFormat)
|
|
{
|
|
FreeProducedString(pwszFormat);
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
|
// DTM_SETFORMAT wParam=void lParam=LPCTSTR
|
|
// Sets the formatting string to a copy of lParam.
|
|
case DTM_SETFORMAT:
|
|
{
|
|
lres = DTM_OnSetFormat(pdp, (LPCTSTR)lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
case DTM_SETMCCOLOR:
|
|
if (wParam < MCSC_COLORCOUNT)
|
|
{
|
|
COLORREF clr = pdp->clr[wParam];
|
|
pdp->clr[wParam] = (COLORREF)lParam;
|
|
if (pdp->hwndMC)
|
|
SendMessage(pdp->hwndMC, MCM_SETCOLOR, wParam, lParam);
|
|
return clr;
|
|
}
|
|
return -1;
|
|
|
|
case DTM_GETMCCOLOR:
|
|
if (wParam < MCSC_COLORCOUNT)
|
|
return pdp->clr[wParam];
|
|
return -1;
|
|
|
|
case DTM_GETMONTHCAL:
|
|
return (LRESULT)(UINT_PTR)pdp->hwndMC;
|
|
|
|
// wParam -- HFONT, LOWORD(lParam) -- fRedraw
|
|
case DTM_SETMCFONT:
|
|
pdp->hfontMC = (HFONT)wParam;
|
|
if (pdp->hwndMC)
|
|
SendMessage(pdp->hwndMC, WM_SETFONT, wParam, lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
// returns the font
|
|
case DTM_GETMCFONT:
|
|
return (LRESULT)pdp->hfontMC;
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
if (CCWndProc(&pdp->ci, message, wParam, lParam, &lres))
|
|
return lres;
|
|
|
|
DoDefault:
|
|
lres = DefWindowProc(hwnd, message, wParam, lParam);
|
|
break;
|
|
} /* switch (message) */
|
|
|
|
return(lres);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LRESULT DPNcCreateHandler(HWND hwnd)
|
|
{
|
|
DATEPICK *pdp;
|
|
|
|
// Sink the datepick -- we may only want to do this if WS_BORDER is set
|
|
SetWindowBits(hwnd, GWL_EXSTYLE, WS_EX_CLIENTEDGE, WS_EX_CLIENTEDGE);
|
|
|
|
// Allocate storage for the dtpick structure
|
|
pdp = (DATEPICK *)NearAlloc(sizeof(DATEPICK));
|
|
if (pdp)
|
|
DatePick_SetPtr(hwnd, pdp);
|
|
|
|
return((LRESULT)pdp);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void DPDestroyHandler(HWND hwnd, DATEPICK *pdp, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
|
|
{
|
|
if (pdp)
|
|
{
|
|
SECDestroy(&pdp->sec);
|
|
MCFreeCalendarInfo(&pdp->sec.ct);
|
|
GlobalFreePtr(pdp);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
DatePick_SetPtr(hwnd, NULL);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// set any locale-dependent values
|
|
#define DTS_TIMEFORMATONLY (DTS_TIMEFORMAT & ~DTS_UPDOWN) // remove the UPDOWN bit for testing
|
|
|
|
LRESULT DPCreateHandler(DATEPICK *pdp, HWND hwnd, LPCREATESTRUCT lpcs)
|
|
{
|
|
HFONT hfont;
|
|
SYSTEMTIME st;
|
|
LCID lcid;
|
|
|
|
// Initialize our data.
|
|
CIInitialize(&pdp->ci, hwnd, lpcs);
|
|
|
|
if (pdp->ci.style & DTS_INVALIDBITS)
|
|
return(-1);
|
|
|
|
if (pdp->ci.style & DTS_UPDOWN)
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->fUseUpDown = TRUE;
|
|
pdp->hwndUD = CreateWindow(UPDOWN_CLASS, NULL,
|
|
WS_CHILD | WS_VISIBLE | (pdp->ci.style & WS_DISABLED),
|
|
CW_USEDEFAULT, CW_USEDEFAULT, CW_USEDEFAULT, CW_USEDEFAULT, hwnd,
|
|
(HMENU)DATEPICK_UPDOWN, HINST_THISDLL, NULL);
|
|
}
|
|
if (DatePick_ShowCheck(pdp))
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->sec.fNone = TRUE; // ugly: this SEC stuff should be merged back into DATEPICK
|
|
pdp->iseLastActive = SUBEDIT_NONE;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
pdp->fEnabled = !(pdp->ci.style & WS_DISABLED);
|
|
pdp->fCheck = TRUE; // start checked
|
|
|
|
// Default minimum date is the epoch
|
|
pdp->stMin = c_stEpoch;
|
|
|
|
// Default maximum date is armageddon
|
|
pdp->stMax = c_stArmageddon;
|
|
|
|
pdp->gdtr = GDTR_MIN; // We marked MIN as set in IE4, go figure
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// See if the date/time picker supports this calendar. [samera]
|
|
//
|
|
MCGetCalendarInfo(&pdp->sec.ct);
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// If the DTP is RTL mirrored and it's a Time-Only field, then
|
|
// we need to mirror format string so that it's displayed correctly
|
|
// on a RTL mirrored window. In case of Arabic, we need to swap the
|
|
// Time-Marker to the other side (visual left) so that it looks ok.
|
|
// For the hebrew, we need to swap the field (whether it's date or time)
|
|
// bacause unlike Arabic, it doesn't have its own digit so it reads
|
|
// from LeftToRight. [samera]
|
|
//
|
|
lcid = GetUserDefaultLCID();
|
|
pdp->sec.fMirrorSEC = pdp->sec.fSwapTimeMarker = FALSE;
|
|
if (IS_WINDOW_RTL_MIRRORED(hwnd))
|
|
{
|
|
if (pdp->ci.style & DTS_TIMEFORMATONLY)
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->sec.fMirrorSEC = TRUE;
|
|
|
|
if ((PRIMARYLANGID(LANGIDFROMLCID(lcid))) == LANG_ARABIC)
|
|
pdp->sec.fSwapTimeMarker = TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
else if((PRIMARYLANGID(LANGIDFROMLCID(lcid))) == LANG_HEBREW)
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->sec.fMirrorSEC = TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
// initialize SUBEDITCONTROL
|
|
pdp->sec.pci = &pdp->ci;
|
|
GetLocalTime(&st);
|
|
SECSetSystemtime(pdp, &st);
|
|
SECSetFont(&pdp->sec, NULL);
|
|
pdp->fLocale = TRUE;
|
|
DPHandleLocaleChange(pdp);
|
|
MCLoadString(IDS_DELIMETERS, pdp->sec.szDelimeters, ARRAYSIZE(pdp->sec.szDelimeters));
|
|
|
|
|
|
hfont = NULL;
|
|
if (lpcs->hwndParent)
|
|
hfont = (HFONT)SendMessage(lpcs->hwndParent, WM_GETFONT, 0, 0);
|
|
DPHandleSetFont(pdp, hfont, FALSE);
|
|
|
|
// initialize the colors
|
|
MCInitColorArray(pdp->clr);
|
|
return(0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LRESULT DPOnStyleChanging(DATEPICK *pdp, UINT gwl, LPSTYLESTRUCT pinfo)
|
|
{
|
|
if (gwl == GWL_STYLE)
|
|
{
|
|
DWORD changeFlags = pdp->ci.style ^ pinfo->styleNew;
|
|
|
|
// Don't allow these bits to change
|
|
changeFlags &= DTS_UPDOWN | DTS_SHOWNONE | DTS_INVALIDBITS;
|
|
|
|
pinfo->styleNew ^= changeFlags;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return(0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LRESULT DPOnStyleChanged(DATEPICK *pdp, UINT gwl, LPSTYLESTRUCT pinfo)
|
|
{
|
|
if (gwl == GWL_STYLE)
|
|
{
|
|
DWORD changeFlags = pdp->ci.style ^ pinfo->styleNew;
|
|
|
|
ASSERT(!(changeFlags & (DTS_UPDOWN|DTS_SHOWNONE)));
|
|
|
|
pdp->ci.style = pinfo->styleNew;
|
|
|
|
if (changeFlags & (DTS_SHORTDATEFORMAT|DTS_LONGDATEFORMAT|DTS_TIMEFORMAT|DTS_INVALIDBITS))
|
|
{
|
|
DPHandleLocaleChange(pdp);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (changeFlags & (WS_BORDER | WS_CAPTION | WS_THICKFRAME)) {
|
|
// the changing of these bits affect the size of the window
|
|
// but not until after this message is handled
|
|
// so post ourself a message.
|
|
PostMessage(pdp->ci.hwnd, DTMP_WINDOWPOSCHANGED, 0, 0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return(0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
void DPHandleLocaleChange(DATEPICK *pdp)
|
|
{
|
|
//
|
|
// See if the date/time picker supports this new calendar, and refresh
|
|
// era names as appropriate.
|
|
//
|
|
MCGetCalendarInfo(&pdp->sec.ct);
|
|
|
|
if (pdp->fLocale)
|
|
{
|
|
TCHAR szFormat[DTP_FORMATLENGTH];
|
|
|
|
switch (pdp->ci.style & DTS_FORMATMASK)
|
|
{
|
|
case DTS_TIMEFORMATONLY:
|
|
GetLocaleInfo(pdp->sec.ct.lcid, LOCALE_STIMEFORMAT, szFormat, ARRAYSIZE(szFormat));
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case DTS_LONGDATEFORMAT:
|
|
GetLocaleInfo(pdp->sec.ct.lcid, LOCALE_SLONGDATE, szFormat, ARRAYSIZE(szFormat));
|
|
break;
|
|
|
|
case DTS_SHORTDATEFORMAT:
|
|
case DTS_SHORTDATECENTURYFORMAT:
|
|
GetLocaleInfo(pdp->sec.ct.lcid, LOCALE_SSHORTDATE, szFormat, ARRAYSIZE(szFormat));
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
SECParseFormat(pdp, &pdp->sec, szFormat);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void DPHandleSetFont(DATEPICK *pdp, HFONT hfont, BOOL fRedraw)
|
|
{
|
|
SECSetFont(&pdp->sec, hfont);
|
|
SECRecomputeSizing(&pdp->sec, &pdp->rc);
|
|
pdp->ci.uiCodePage = GetCodePageForFont(hfont);
|
|
|
|
if (fRedraw)
|
|
{
|
|
InvalidateRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
UpdateWindow(pdp->ci.hwnd);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void DPPaint(DATEPICK *pdp, HDC hdc)
|
|
{
|
|
if (DatePick_ShowCheck(pdp))
|
|
{
|
|
if (RectVisible(hdc, &pdp->rcCheck))
|
|
{
|
|
RECT rc;
|
|
UINT dfcs;
|
|
rc = pdp->rcCheck;
|
|
if (pdp->fCheckFocus)
|
|
DrawFocusRect(hdc, &rc);
|
|
|
|
InflateRect(&rc, -1 , -1);
|
|
dfcs = DFCS_BUTTONCHECK;
|
|
if (pdp->fCheck)
|
|
dfcs |= DFCS_CHECKED;
|
|
if (!pdp->fEnabled)
|
|
dfcs |= DFCS_INACTIVE;
|
|
DrawFrameControl(hdc, &rc, DFC_BUTTON, dfcs);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (!pdp->fFreeEditing)
|
|
SECDrawSubedits(hdc, &pdp->sec, pdp->fFocus, pdp->fCheck ? pdp->fEnabled : FALSE);
|
|
|
|
if (!pdp->fUseUpDown && RectVisible(hdc, &pdp->rcBtn))
|
|
DPDrawDropdownButton(pdp, hdc, FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void _RecomputeMonthCalRect(DATEPICK *pdp, LPRECT prcCal, LPRECT prcCalT )
|
|
{
|
|
RECT rcCal = *prcCal;
|
|
RECT rcCalT = *prcCalT;
|
|
RECT rcWorkArea;
|
|
MONITORINFO mi = {0};
|
|
HMONITOR hMonitor;
|
|
|
|
if (DatePick_RightAlign(pdp))
|
|
{
|
|
rcCal.left = rcCal.right - (rcCalT.right - rcCalT.left);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
rcCal.right = rcCal.left + (rcCalT.right - rcCalT.left);
|
|
}
|
|
rcCal.bottom = rcCal.top + (rcCalT.bottom - rcCalT.top);
|
|
|
|
// Get the information about the most appropriate monitor.
|
|
// (This includes both the work area and the monitor size.
|
|
hMonitor = MonitorFromRect(&rcCal, MONITOR_DEFAULTTONEAREST);
|
|
mi.cbSize = sizeof(mi);
|
|
GetMonitorInfo(hMonitor, &mi);
|
|
|
|
// we need to know where to fit this rectangle into
|
|
if (GetWindowLong(pdp->ci.hwnd, GWL_EXSTYLE) & WS_EX_TOPMOST)
|
|
{
|
|
// if we're topmost, our limits are the screen limits (not the working area)
|
|
rcWorkArea = mi.rcMonitor;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
// otherwise it's the limits of the workarea
|
|
rcWorkArea = mi.rcWork;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// slide left if off the right side of area
|
|
if (rcCal.right > rcWorkArea.right)
|
|
{
|
|
int nTmp = rcCal.right - rcWorkArea.right;
|
|
rcCal.left -= nTmp;
|
|
rcCal.right -= nTmp;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// slide right if off the left side of area
|
|
if (rcCal.left < rcWorkArea.left)
|
|
{
|
|
int nTmp = rcWorkArea.left - rcCal.left;
|
|
rcCal.left += nTmp;
|
|
rcCal.right += nTmp;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// move to top of control if off the bottom side of area
|
|
if (rcCal.bottom > rcWorkArea.bottom)
|
|
{
|
|
RECT rcT = pdp->rc;
|
|
int nTmp = rcCal.bottom - rcCal.top;
|
|
|
|
MapWindowRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, NULL, (LPPOINT)&rcT); // 2 ClientToScreen
|
|
|
|
rcCal.bottom = rcT.top;
|
|
rcCal.top = rcCal.bottom - nTmp;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
*prcCal = rcCal;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void DPLBD_MonthCal(DATEPICK *pdp, BOOL fLButtonDown)
|
|
{
|
|
HDC hdc;
|
|
HWND hwndMC;
|
|
RECT rcT, rcCalT;
|
|
RECT rcBtn, rcCal;
|
|
BOOL fBtnDown; // Is the button drawn DOWN or UP
|
|
BOOL fBtnActive; // Is the button still active
|
|
SYSTEMTIME st;
|
|
SYSTEMTIME stOld;
|
|
DWORD dwWidth;
|
|
|
|
hdc = GetDC(pdp->ci.hwnd);
|
|
|
|
// turn datetimepick on but remove all focus -- the MonthCal will have focus
|
|
if (!pdp->fCheck)
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->fCheck = TRUE;
|
|
InvalidateRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
DPNotifyDateChange(pdp);
|
|
}
|
|
if (pdp->fCheckFocus)
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->fCheckFocus = FALSE;
|
|
InvalidateRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, &pdp->rcCheck, TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
SECSetCurSubed(pdp, SUBEDIT_NONE);
|
|
|
|
if (fLButtonDown)
|
|
DPDrawDropdownButton(pdp, hdc, TRUE);
|
|
|
|
rcT = pdp->rc;
|
|
MapWindowRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, NULL, &rcT); //2 ClientToScreen
|
|
|
|
rcBtn = pdp->rcBtn;
|
|
MapWindowRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, NULL, &rcBtn); //ClientToScreen
|
|
|
|
rcCal = rcT; // this size is only temp until
|
|
rcCal.top = rcCal.bottom + 1; // we ask the monthcal how big it
|
|
rcCal.bottom = rcCal.top + 1; // wants to be
|
|
|
|
hwndMC = CreateWindow(g_rgchMCName, NULL, WS_POPUP | WS_BORDER,
|
|
rcCal.left, rcCal.top,
|
|
rcCal.right - rcCal.left, rcCal.bottom - rcCal.top,
|
|
pdp->ci.hwnd, NULL, HINST_THISDLL, NULL);
|
|
if (hwndMC == NULL)
|
|
{
|
|
// BUGBUG: we are left with the button drawn DOWN
|
|
DebugMsg(DM_WARNING, TEXT("DPLBD_MonthCal could not create MONTHCAL"));
|
|
return;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
pdp->hwndMC = hwndMC;
|
|
|
|
// set all the colors:
|
|
{
|
|
int i;
|
|
for (i = 0; i < MCSC_COLORCOUNT; i++)
|
|
{
|
|
SendMessage(hwndMC, MCM_SETCOLOR, i, pdp->clr[i]);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (pdp->hfontMC)
|
|
SendMessage(hwndMC, WM_SETFONT, (WPARAM)pdp->hfontMC, (LPARAM)FALSE);
|
|
|
|
// set min/max dates
|
|
// Relies on HACK! that stMin and stMax are adjacent
|
|
MonthCal_SetRange(hwndMC, GDTR_MIN | GDTR_MAX, &pdp->stMin);
|
|
|
|
SendMessage(hwndMC, MCM_GETMINREQRECT, 0, (LPARAM)&rcCalT);
|
|
ASSERT(rcCalT.left == 0 && rcCalT.top == 0);
|
|
dwWidth = (DWORD)SendMessage(hwndMC, MCM_GETMAXTODAYWIDTH, 0, 0);
|
|
if (dwWidth > (DWORD)rcCalT.right)
|
|
rcCalT.right = dwWidth;
|
|
|
|
SECGetSystemtime(&pdp->sec, &st);
|
|
SendMessage(hwndMC, MCM_SETCURSEL, 0, (LPARAM)&st);
|
|
|
|
_RecomputeMonthCalRect(pdp, &rcCal, &rcCalT);
|
|
MoveWindow(hwndMC, rcCal.left, rcCal.top,
|
|
rcCal.right - rcCal.left, rcCal.bottom - rcCal.top, FALSE);
|
|
|
|
CCSendNotify(&pdp->ci, DTN_DROPDOWN, NULL);
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// HACK-- App may have resized the window during DTN_DROPDOWN,
|
|
// so we need to get the new rcCal rect
|
|
//
|
|
{
|
|
MONTHCAL *pmc = MonthCal_GetPtr(hwndMC);
|
|
_RecomputeMonthCalRect(pdp, &rcCal, &pmc->rc);
|
|
MoveWindow(hwndMC, rcCal.left, rcCal.top,
|
|
rcCal.right - rcCal.left, rcCal.bottom - rcCal.top, FALSE);
|
|
|
|
#ifdef DEBUG
|
|
if (GetAsyncKeyState(VK_CONTROL) < 0)
|
|
(pmc)->ci.style |= MCS_MULTISELECT;
|
|
#endif
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
ShowWindow(hwndMC, SW_SHOWNA);
|
|
|
|
pdp->fShow = TRUE;
|
|
fBtnDown = fLButtonDown;
|
|
fBtnActive = fLButtonDown;
|
|
|
|
stOld = pdp->sec.st;
|
|
|
|
while (pdp->fShow)
|
|
{
|
|
MSG msg;
|
|
|
|
pdp->fShow = (WORD) GetMessage(&msg, NULL, 0, 0);
|
|
|
|
// Here's how button controls work as far as I can tell:
|
|
// Until the "final button draw up", the button draws down when the
|
|
// mouse is over it and it draws up when the mouse is not over it. This
|
|
// entire time, the control is active.
|
|
//
|
|
// The "final button draw up" occurs at the first opportunity of:
|
|
// the user releases the mouse button OR the user moves into the rect
|
|
// of the control. The control does it's action on a "mouse up".
|
|
|
|
if (fBtnActive)
|
|
{
|
|
switch (msg.message) {
|
|
case WM_MOUSEMOVE:
|
|
if (PtInRect(&rcBtn, msg.pt))
|
|
{
|
|
if (!fBtnDown)
|
|
{
|
|
DPDrawDropdownButton(pdp, hdc, TRUE);
|
|
fBtnDown = TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
if (fBtnDown)
|
|
{
|
|
DPDrawDropdownButton(pdp, hdc, FALSE);
|
|
fBtnDown = FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
if (PtInRect(&rcCal, msg.pt))
|
|
{
|
|
fBtnActive = FALSE;
|
|
// let MonthCal think it got a button down
|
|
// IEUNIX: dumb compiler doesn't do well with comments in macros.
|
|
FORWARD_WM_LBUTTONDOWN(hwndMC, FALSE,
|
|
rcCal.left/2 + rcCal.right/2,
|
|
rcCal.top/2 + rcCal.bottom/2,
|
|
0, SendMessage);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
continue; // the MonthCal doesn't need this message
|
|
|
|
case WM_LBUTTONUP:
|
|
if (fBtnDown)
|
|
{
|
|
DPDrawDropdownButton(pdp, hdc, FALSE);
|
|
fBtnDown = FALSE;
|
|
}
|
|
fBtnActive = FALSE;
|
|
continue; // the MonthCal doesn't need this message
|
|
}
|
|
} // if (fBtnActive)
|
|
|
|
// Check for events that cause the calendar to go away
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// These events mean "I like it". We allow Alt+Up or Enter
|
|
// to accept the changes. (Alt+Up for compat with combo boxes.)
|
|
//
|
|
if (((msg.message == WM_LBUTTONDOWN ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_NCLBUTTONDOWN ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_LBUTTONDBLCLK) && !PtInRect(&rcCal, msg.pt)) ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_SYSCOMMAND ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_COMMAND ||
|
|
(msg.message == WM_SYSKEYDOWN && msg.wParam == VK_UP) ||
|
|
(msg.message == WM_KEYDOWN && msg.wParam == VK_RETURN) ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_KILLFOCUS)
|
|
{
|
|
DebugMsg(TF_MONTHCAL,TEXT("DPLBD_MonthCal got a message to accept (%d)"), msg.message);
|
|
pdp->fShow = FALSE;
|
|
continue;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// These events mean "I don't like it".
|
|
//
|
|
else if (((msg.message == WM_RBUTTONDOWN ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_NCRBUTTONDOWN ||
|
|
msg.message == WM_RBUTTONDBLCLK) && !PtInRect(&rcCal, msg.pt)) ||
|
|
(msg.message == WM_KEYDOWN && msg.wParam == VK_ESCAPE))
|
|
{
|
|
DebugMsg(TF_MONTHCAL,TEXT("DPLBD_MonthCal got a message to cancel (%d)"), msg.message);
|
|
pdp->fShow = FALSE;
|
|
pdp->sec.st = stOld;
|
|
DPNotifyDateChange(pdp);
|
|
InvalidateRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
continue;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
TranslateMessage(&msg);
|
|
DispatchMessage(&msg);
|
|
} // while(fShow)
|
|
|
|
CCSendNotify(&pdp->ci, DTN_CLOSEUP, NULL);
|
|
|
|
pdp->hwndMC = NULL;
|
|
DestroyWindow(hwndMC);
|
|
ReleaseDC(pdp->ci.hwnd, hdc);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void DPHandleSECEdit(DATEPICK *pdp)
|
|
{
|
|
TCHAR szBuf[DTP_FORMATLENGTH];
|
|
|
|
if (SECEdit(pdp, szBuf, ARRAYSIZE(szBuf)))
|
|
{
|
|
NMDATETIMESTRING nmdts = {0};
|
|
|
|
nmdts.pszUserString = szBuf;
|
|
// just in case the app doesn't parse the string
|
|
nmdts.st = pdp->sec.st;
|
|
nmdts.dwFlags = (pdp->fCheck==1) ? GDT_VALID : GDT_NONE;
|
|
|
|
CCSendNotify(&pdp->ci, DTN_USERSTRING, &nmdts.nmhdr);
|
|
|
|
// If the app gives us an invalid date, go back to the old date
|
|
if (nmdts.dwFlags == GDT_VALID &&
|
|
!IsValidSystemtime(&nmdts.st))
|
|
{
|
|
nmdts.st = pdp->sec.st;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (nmdts.dwFlags == GDT_NONE)
|
|
{
|
|
if (DatePick_ShowCheck(pdp))
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->fCheck = FALSE;
|
|
pdp->fCheckFocus = TRUE;
|
|
SECSetCurSubed(pdp, SUBEDIT_NONE);
|
|
InvalidateRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
DPNotifyDateChange(pdp);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else if (nmdts.dwFlags == GDT_VALID)
|
|
{
|
|
DPSetDate(pdp, &nmdts.st, FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
LRESULT DPLButtonDown(DATEPICK *pdp, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
|
|
{
|
|
POINT pt;
|
|
BOOL fFocus;
|
|
|
|
if (!pdp->fEnabled)
|
|
return(0);
|
|
|
|
pt.x = GET_X_LPARAM(lParam);
|
|
pt.y = GET_Y_LPARAM(lParam);
|
|
|
|
// reset subed char count
|
|
SECResetSubeditEdit(pdp);
|
|
|
|
fFocus = pdp->fFocus;
|
|
if (!fFocus)
|
|
SetFocus(pdp->ci.hwnd);
|
|
|
|
// display MONTHCAL iif we're not DTS_UPDOWN
|
|
if (!pdp->fUseUpDown && PtInRect(&pdp->rcBtn, pt) && IsWindowVisible(pdp->ci.hwnd))
|
|
{
|
|
DPLBD_MonthCal(pdp, TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (!pdp->fCapture)
|
|
{
|
|
// Un/check checkbox
|
|
if (DatePick_ShowCheck(pdp) && PtInRect(&pdp->rcCheck, pt))
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->fCheck = !pdp->fCheck;
|
|
pdp->fCheckFocus = 1;
|
|
SECSetCurSubed(pdp, SUBEDIT_NONE);
|
|
InvalidateRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
DPNotifyDateChange(pdp);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// Select a subedit
|
|
else if (pdp->fCheck)
|
|
{
|
|
if (DatePick_AppCanParse(pdp) && fFocus)
|
|
{
|
|
// First click brings focus to a subedit, second click starts editing
|
|
DPHandleSECEdit(pdp);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
int isubed;
|
|
pt.x += pdp->sec.xScroll;
|
|
isubed = SECSubeditFromPt(&pdp->sec, pt);
|
|
if (isubed >= 0)
|
|
{
|
|
SECSetCurSubed(pdp, isubed);
|
|
if (DatePick_ShowCheck(pdp))
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->fCheckFocus = 0;
|
|
InvalidateRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, &pdp->rcCheck, TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return(0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void DPRecomputeSizing(DATEPICK *pdp, RECT *prect)
|
|
{
|
|
RECT rcTmp;
|
|
|
|
if (DatePick_ShowCheck(pdp))
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->rcCheck.top = prect->top + 1;
|
|
pdp->rcCheck.bottom = prect->bottom - 1;
|
|
pdp->rcCheck.left = prect->left + 1;
|
|
pdp->rcCheck.right = prect->left + (pdp->rcCheck.bottom - pdp->rcCheck.top);
|
|
|
|
// occupy at most half the width of the window
|
|
if (pdp->rcCheck.right > prect->left + (prect->right - prect->left)/2)
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->rcCheck.right = prect->left + (prect->right - prect->left)/2;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->rcCheck.top = prect->top;
|
|
pdp->rcCheck.bottom = prect->top;
|
|
pdp->rcCheck.left = prect->left;
|
|
pdp->rcCheck.right = prect->left + DPXBUFFER - 1;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
pdp->rcBtn = *prect;
|
|
pdp->rcBtn.left = pdp->rcBtn.right - GetSystemMetrics(SM_CXVSCROLL);
|
|
if (pdp->rcBtn.left < pdp->rcCheck.right)
|
|
pdp->rcBtn.left = pdp->rcCheck.right;
|
|
if (pdp->hwndUD)
|
|
MoveWindow(pdp->hwndUD, pdp->rcBtn.left, pdp->rcBtn.top, pdp->rcBtn.right - pdp->rcBtn.left + 1, pdp->rcBtn.bottom - pdp->rcBtn.top + 1, FALSE);
|
|
|
|
rcTmp = pdp->rc;
|
|
pdp->rc.top = prect->top;
|
|
pdp->rc.bottom = prect->bottom;
|
|
pdp->rc.left = pdp->rcCheck.right + 1;
|
|
pdp->rc.right = pdp->rcBtn.left - 1;
|
|
SECRecomputeSizing(&pdp->sec, &pdp->rc);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// deal with control codes
|
|
LRESULT DPHandleKeydown(DATEPICK *pdp, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
|
|
{
|
|
int delta = 1;
|
|
|
|
if (wParam == VK_F4 && !pdp->fUseUpDown)
|
|
{
|
|
DPLBD_MonthCal(pdp, FALSE);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (DatePick_AppCanParse(pdp) && wParam == VK_F2)
|
|
{
|
|
DPHandleSECEdit(pdp);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (pdp->fCheckFocus)
|
|
{
|
|
switch (wParam)
|
|
{
|
|
case VK_LEFT:
|
|
delta = -1;
|
|
// fall through...
|
|
case VK_RIGHT:
|
|
if (pdp->fCheck)
|
|
{
|
|
if (SUBEDIT_NONE != SECIncrFocus(pdp, delta))
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->fCheckFocus = FALSE;
|
|
InvalidateRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, &pdp->rcCheck, TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
switch (wParam)
|
|
{
|
|
case VK_HOME:
|
|
if (GetKeyState(VK_CONTROL) < 0)
|
|
{
|
|
SYSTEMTIME st;
|
|
GetLocalTime(&st);
|
|
DPSetDate(pdp, &st, TRUE);
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
// fall through...
|
|
|
|
default:
|
|
if (SECHandleKeydown(pdp, wParam, lParam))
|
|
{
|
|
DPNotifyDateChange(pdp);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (DatePick_ShowCheck(pdp))
|
|
{
|
|
if (pdp->sec.iseCur < 0)
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->fCheckFocus = TRUE;
|
|
InvalidateRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, &pdp->rcCheck, TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
break;
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return(0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
// deal with characters
|
|
LRESULT DPHandleChar(DATEPICK *pdp, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
|
|
{
|
|
TCHAR ch = (TCHAR)wParam;
|
|
|
|
if (pdp->fCheckFocus)
|
|
{
|
|
// this is the only character we care about in this case
|
|
if (ch == TEXT(' '))
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->fCheck = 1-pdp->fCheck;
|
|
InvalidateRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
DPNotifyDateChange(pdp);
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
MessageBeep(MB_ICONHAND);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
// let the subedit handle this -- a value can change
|
|
SECHandleChar(pdp, ch);
|
|
}
|
|
return(0);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void DPNotifyDateChange(DATEPICK *pdp)
|
|
{
|
|
NMDATETIMECHANGE nmdc = {0};
|
|
BOOL fChanged;
|
|
|
|
if (pdp->fNoNotify)
|
|
return;
|
|
|
|
if (pdp->fCheck == 0)
|
|
{
|
|
nmdc.dwFlags = GDT_NONE;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
// validate date - do it here in only one place
|
|
if (CmpSystemtime(&pdp->sec.st, &pdp->stMin) < 0)
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->sec.st = pdp->stMin;
|
|
InvalidateRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
SECInvalidate(&pdp->sec, SE_APP);
|
|
}
|
|
else if (CmpSystemtime(&pdp->sec.st, &pdp->stMax) > 0)
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->sec.st = pdp->stMax;
|
|
InvalidateRect(pdp->ci.hwnd, NULL, TRUE);
|
|
SECInvalidate(&pdp->sec, SE_APP);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
nmdc.dwFlags = GDT_VALID;
|
|
SECGetSystemtime(&pdp->sec, &nmdc.st);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
fChanged = CmpSystemtime(&pdp->stPrev, &nmdc.st);
|
|
if (fChanged) {
|
|
MyNotifyWinEvent(EVENT_OBJECT_NAMECHANGE, pdp->ci.hwnd, OBJID_WINDOW, INDEXID_CONTAINER);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
//
|
|
// APP COMPAT: IE4 always notified even if the date didn't change.
|
|
// I don't know of any apps that rely on this
|
|
// but I'm not gonna risk it.
|
|
//
|
|
if (fChanged || pdp->ci.iVersion < 5)
|
|
{
|
|
pdp->stPrev = nmdc.st;
|
|
CCSendNotify(&pdp->ci, DTN_DATETIMECHANGE, &nmdc.nmhdr);
|
|
}
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
BOOL DPSetDate(DATEPICK *pdp, SYSTEMTIME *pst, BOOL fMungeDate)
|
|
{
|
|
BOOL fChanged = FALSE;
|
|
|
|
// make sure that the new date is within the valid range
|
|
if (CmpSystemtime(pst, &pdp->stMin) < 0)
|
|
{
|
|
if (!fMungeDate)
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
pst = &pdp->stMin;
|
|
}
|
|
if (CmpSystemtime(&pdp->stMax, pst) < 0)
|
|
{
|
|
if (!fMungeDate)
|
|
return(FALSE);
|
|
pst = &pdp->stMax;
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (fMungeDate)
|
|
{
|
|
// only copy the date portion
|
|
CopyDate(*pst, pdp->sec.st);
|
|
fChanged = TRUE;
|
|
}
|
|
else
|
|
{
|
|
fChanged = SECSetSystemtime(pdp, pst);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
if (fChanged)
|
|
{
|
|
SECInvalidate(&pdp->sec, SE_APP); // SE_APP invalidates everything
|
|
DPNotifyDateChange(pdp);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
return(TRUE);
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
void DPDrawDropdownButton(DATEPICK *pdp, HDC hdc, BOOL fPressed)
|
|
{
|
|
UINT dfcs;
|
|
|
|
dfcs = DFCS_SCROLLDOWN;
|
|
if (fPressed)
|
|
dfcs |= DFCS_PUSHED | DFCS_FLAT;
|
|
if (!pdp->fEnabled)
|
|
dfcs |= DFCS_INACTIVE;
|
|
DrawFrameControl(hdc, &pdp->rcBtn, DFC_SCROLL, dfcs);
|
|
}
|